Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions
description
Transcript of Sap Cr100 Tcrm10 Tcrm20 Questions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
1 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
310810
Hello Everyone
This document is a helpful tool for studying for the SAP CRM certification test The
required documentations for the test are the next SAP documentations
httpwwwsapcomgermanyserviceseducationschulungskatalogsap-
crmcertificationtestepxcontext=[[C_TCRM20_70|]]|
The principle of this document is very simple for each page on the SAP study
documentation I wrote appropriate questions The answers are on the second
attached document SAP CRM100-TCRM10-TCRM20 ANSWERS
Remarks
1 I cannot assure that the questions and answers are correct I take no
responsibility for the information on this document The student is responsible
alone I am not an authority regarding the SAP CRM 70
2 Some of the questions would appear vague and unclear Try to relate them to
the topic on the documentation
3 I apologize in advance for any misspells or grammatical mistakes I am not a
native English speaker
Index
BTr Business Transaction Con Ty Condition Type
TrTy Transaction Type BO Business Object
It Cat Item Category NB Navigation Bar
SO System Object BR Business Role
TDP Test Determination procedure OVP Over View Page
PP Pricing Procedure DLG Direct Link Group
PDP Partner Determination Procedure
WCLL Work Center Logical Link
AS Access Sequence MW Middleware
WC Web Client UI User Interface
MD Master Data DC Distribution Channel
S2P
B2P
Sold to party
Bill to party and etc
DIV Division
InsB Installment Base
Good Luck
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
2 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Itay Abuhav
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
1 What are the key Functions in SAP CRM
2 What are the contact channels on SAP CRM
11
3 In which ways can the different SAP CRM applications be integrated in the
organization (5)
12
4 Which middleware components are to be installed in order to realize the
connection between the SAP CRM server and the ERP server (two
components)
13
5 Which interface is common and recommended for the CRM end users 17
6 What is Customization in a SAP system
7 What characterizes the Customization in SAP system (2)
8 What options have we in order to optimize customers requirements
specification on the SAP system
18
9 What is Transaction SPRO 21
10 Where do you change the design view setting (like layouts and font) on the
Web Client
22
11 What are the relevant terms for Business Partners (3)
12 How are the numbers of the entities determined
33
13 What is the main objective of a business partner
14 What is the difference between CRM Business partner model and other
ERP systems
15 What serves the business partner relationship definitions (roles) of a
business partner
34
16 What are the business partner categories
17 What is a business partner group
18 Who can be included as a business partner on the system
19 What is the meaning of an organization definition for a business partner
35
20 What is the meaning of business partner role
21 How many roles could be assigned to one business partner
36
22 What is the Objective of the BP relationship
23 What are the Attributes of a Relationship
37
24 What types of business partner relationships the system maintains
25 What is the purpose of a Relationship category
38
26 What is the BAS What are the objectives of BAS 39
27 To whom we define the marketing attributes
28 What is the Objective of the marketing attributes
29 What is the use of the marketing attributes (2)
40
30 What is the account classification What includes the account
classification
31 What is the use of account classification
32 How do you classify an account
41
33 To Which System object we assign the Lifecycle 43
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
3 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
34 What is the use of the Lifecycle Management
35 What is the relation between the Account lifecycle and the role
36 What is the relation between the Account lifecycle and the BP
37 How do you implement the lifecycle in the system transactions 44
38 What does the lifecycle determines when assigned to an entity
39 What is the relation between lifecycle and exclusion group
45
40 What is the use of mini templates
41 To which data are the mini templates assigned
42 What is the use of the Buying Center
43 To which System entity the Buying center is assigned
47
44 What are the Hierarchy nodes
45 What is the relation between a node from the ERP system and one form the
CRM
48
46 What are the hierarchy nodes Categories
47 What is the difference between them
48 What is the mobility policy in a node
49
49 Which methods there are for creating or updating BP master data in the
system (6)
50
50 What is the main difference between CRM and SAP ERP system when
handling a BP
51 What other differences are mentioned (4)
51
52 What is the main different between the CRM and the ERP when managing
BP
53 What is the basis for the difference
52
54 What is the purpose and advantages of the Easy Enhancement
Workbench
54
55 What are the Objectives of the Organizational Management
56 What is the relation between the SAP ERP and the CRM on the
organizational model
57 How the organizational Determination contributes the processes
80
58 What the three uses of the Organizational Management 81
59 What is the principle of Organizational Management 82
60 What are the suggested attributes of the CRM Organizational Model (5) 83
61 Which are the types of organizational Objects and what is the difference
between them
62 What are the attributes of each Organizational Object
84
63 What is the use of the General Attributes
64 What is the relation between the Org Unit and the position regarding the
Attributes
85
65 What are the Sales Functions on the organizational structure and their
responsibilities
66 Which one is the mandatory Function
67 What is the main difference between the various org objects
86
68 What are the service Functions on the organizational structure and their 87
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
4 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibilities
69 Which one is the mandatory Function
70 What is the main difference between the various org objects
71 What is the Marketing Functions on the organizational structure
72 What functions the Marketing organization allows us
73 What is its significance in compare with Sales and Services
88
74 What are the two methods to determine Organizational data to a
transaction
91
75 How does the system locate data and from where for realizing a
Transaction
76 Which two Kinds of rules guide the system when determining the data for
Transactions
77 Why is it required to determine certain rules to certain transactions
92
78 What is the system process flow of the Organizational data determination
79 What is the sequence of configuration flow of the Organizational data
determination
95
80 What are the product types in the CRM system (6)
81 What kinds of product data can be transferred from the ERP to the CRM
82 What is the reason that the data cannot be changed
111 TCRM10
ndash 481
83 What option is there to changes unchangeable product data on the CRM
system that sourced from the ERP
84 What is the sequence of creating a product on the ERP and transferring it to
the CRM and which system middle is required
113 TCRM10
- 482
85 What is the objective of the relationship
86 What are Accessories Customers products Vendors products Service
Products Spare part product Component products Warranties
87 Which system condition should be maintained in order to set the relationship
type
114 TCRM10
- 482
88 What are the Objectives of a Competitor Product
89 What is the use of the competitor product
90 What kind of Product type is a Competitor Product
91 Which transaction can use the competitor product
115 TCRM10
-484
92 What is the hierarchy of product definition
93 What is the definition and purpose of a Set Type
94 What are the Set Type elements
95 Which kind of set types has the product master and what each one
contains
116 TCRM10
- 490
96 What is the basic Set Type definition and Hierarchies for a product on the
CRM System
97 What is the sequence of transferring product from the ERP to the CRM
98 What is the requirement for Material product that was transferred from the
ERP
99 What is the significance of assigning a product to the product type
100 What is the difference between the hierarchy assignment to the different
product types in the CRM system And why
117
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
5 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
101 What is the different type of service products
102 What is the Warranty product and which kind of warranty product there
are
118 TCRM10
- 492
103 What is the objective on an Attribute
104 What are the parameters that define Attribute
105 What are the Objective of Set types
106 Which options are there for Set types uses
107 What is the set type restriction
108 Which Object is assigned to another
109 What are the mini templates
119 TCRM10
- 493
110 What enables the Product Category
111 What is the Objective of Product Category
112 Describe the logic behind the structure of Hierarchies and Product
Category and set type What is the role of the set type
120 TCRM10
ndash 493
113 What are the various elements necessary to enhance a Product 121 TCRM10
ndash 493
114 What is an Adapter Object
115 What is the two required downloads when replicating data from the ERP
to the CRM
122 TCRM10
- 493
116 What are the Objectives (3) of a Transaction
117 What are the options between various transactions (3)
151 TCRM20
-1 ndash 17
118 What are the two different areas on a transaction and what is the
difference between them
119 What is the use of a BTr
120 What is the use of the BTr Type
121 What is the additional level that a sales BTr has Which check is
required to operate this level
152 TCRM20
-1 - 18
122 What is determined when a TrTy is set for a BTr What are the three
elements
123 Name a few of the Transactions Characteristics
124 What is the restriction when working with a BTr regarding follow ups
125 What is the objective of a TrTy
126 What are the Blocking Reasons Where is it defined
127 What is the use of the permission channels
153 TCRM20
ndash 19 - 51
128 What triggers the Item Category
129 What are the attributes determined by the Item Category
130 Which data and profiles are fixed on an Item Category and what
resembles these data For which type of information are they divided
131 Which data is then determined and what resembles these data
154 TCRM20
ndash 20-54
132 What is the Item Category Group Where is it defined
133 What is the sequence of the item category determination
134 What is the condition regarding the item category determination when
replicating information from the ERP to the CRM Why
155 TCRM20
- 54
135 How the system does determine the Item Category
136 What are the options for Item category determination aside from the
156 TCRM20
- 55
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
6 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
default ones
137 What are the two options to maintain Preceding and subsequent
Documents
138 What is necessary in order to carry them out
139 What is the restriction when performing a copy control for a Transaction
157 TCRM20
- 93
140 What is the objective Transaction History
141 What is the difference between different kinds of transactions
142 What does the Transaction History allow
143 What triggers the transaction History
158 TCRM20
ndash 95
144 What is the sequence of the copy control
145 In Which cases the Copy control is mandatory
146 What is the case with Service when performing copy control
159 TCRM20
- 97
147 What is linking a document subsequently
148 What is copied and what is not copied when linking a document
subsequently
149 What is updated when the subsequent link was done
150 Which profile is required in order to allow a subsequent link
160 TCRM20
- 98
151 What are the Basic Functions in a BTr and what is the objective and use
of each (profiles)
161 TCRM20
- 98
152 What are the notes Which kinds of notes the system offers
153 What are the notes features
154 To which SO can these notes be maintained
162 TCRM20
- 99
155 How looks the Hierarchy of the TDP
156 What is determined for the Text under the TDP
157 To which SO assign one the TDP
163 TCRM20
- 100
158 What is the Objective of the Date Management
159 In which cases the Date Management is usable
160 For which BTr the date management is used
161 What are the characteristics of the Date Management
162 According to which System Object the Date Management rule is
determined
164 TCRM20
- 102
163 What are Date Types
164 What are durations
165 What are the date rules
165 TCRM20
- 103
166 What is the objective of the status management and what is the use
167 What Kind of System Statuses are managed on the System
168 What are the User Status restriction regarding a BTr
169 What are the User Status options regarding a User
166 TCRM20
- 104
170 Which system Objects determine the status Profile
171 What is necessary to define and activate a status profile on the system
172 What is a status number
173 What is determined when a status profile is called Which another
system rule is then required
167 TCRM20
- 105
174 What is the Objective Incompleteness Check
175 What is the use of the Incompleteness Check
168 TCRM20
- 107
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
7 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
176 What is the hierarchy of the Incompleteness Process To which system
object is it assigned
177 What is the objective of the Change History What are the three
parameters
178 Where is the Change History defined
170 TCRM20
- 130
179 What is the Objective of the activity
180 What kinds of Activities are there in the System
181 What characterizes an Activity What is the difference from other BTr
(3)
182 What are the two leading Business Transactions Categories for activities
that are defined in the System What is the difference between them
183 What is the relation between activities and other BTr
217 TCRM20
- 131
184 What is the Business Activity Structure And what is included
185 What is the relation between the activity Category and the Transaction
Type
218
186 What is included under the default data on the activity TrTy
187 What is required in order to add product to activities
219 TCRM20
- 136
188 What are the options for Follow-up Activities on the System What is the
difference between them
220 TCRM20
- 137
189 What are the characteristics of a questionnaire 221 TCRM20
- 137
190 What is the main purpose of the Activity Journal
191 What is the use of the Journal Activity
192 What is required in order to track Products
193 What is the relation with other TrTy
222 TCRM20
- 140
194 What is the objective of the connection between the CRM System and
the groupware
195 What is the use of the groupware application
196 What is required when defining the groupware
197 What are the system requirements for operating the groupware
223 TCRM20
- 142
198 What are the Objects that could be transferred between the CRM and a
Groupware System
199 Which Technology Elements are used to execute this option What
components are required
224 TCRM20
- 144
200 What is the activity analysis
201 What is necessary in order to be able to create reports
225
202 What is the objective of the PP
203 What is the use of the PP (5)
204 What are the most important sources of information are in the PP
243 TCRM20
- 168
205 What triggers the PP
206 What is the process sequence of the PP
244 TCRM20
- 169
207 What are the four principles of the PP (for data entering for document
for process)
245 TCRM20
- 171
208 What is the Partner Function Category 246 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
209 What is the Partner Function
210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure
211 What is the Access Sequence
- 176
212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner
Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner
Function Category and the Partner Function
213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the
Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the
connection to the Access sequence
214 What is the use of the Lock
215 What is the Undefined Partner
247 TCRM20
- 178
216 What is the Objective of the PDP
217 What is the use of the PDP
218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP
219 What type of data the PDP brings
220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)
221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)
222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure
248 TCRM20
- 179
223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence
224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it
referring
225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined
249 TCRM20
- 180
226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a
process in the system
227 What are the parameters checked by the AS
228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in
order to relate a PDP to a TrTy
229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is
assigned to him
250 TCRM20
- 181
230 What is the purpose of actions on the System
231 What is the use of actions on the System
232 What is the terminology for the actions processing
273 TCRM20
- 207
233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action
234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned
235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile
236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the
execution of actions
274 TCRM20
- 208
237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System
and what is the relation between them
238 For which SO are the conditions assigned
239 What are the two mode of defining them
275 TCRM20
- 209
240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time
241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the
difference between them (3) Give examples for each
242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time
276 TCRM20
- 210
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown
244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of
each one
277 TCRM20
- 211
245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition
246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has
each
247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile
278 TCRM20
- 212
248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20
- 213
249 What is a Smart Form How does it work
250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on
the SAP Smart Form
281 TCRM20
- 215
251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor
252 Where is it originated
253 What is the use of the action monitor
254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report
282 TCRM20
- 215
255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System
On which technology is it based
256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the
relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)
257 What is the use of the PP
258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing
possibilities with it
259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the
CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm
305 TCRM20
- 243
260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the
difference between them
306 TCRM20
- 244
261 What is the logic structure of the PP
262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the
use calculation )
307 TCRM20
- 245
263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing
Procedure (5)
308 TCRM20
- 246
264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it
operative
265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty
309 TCRM20
- 248
266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access
267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty
268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a
Con Is operated
269 What is a condition record
310 TCRM20
- 249
270 What is the Condition Tables
271 How does the condition Table is activated
272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table
311 TCRM20
- 250
273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251
275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure
276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of
pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other
possibilities are
277 What is the Value scale
313 TCRM20
- 255
278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20
- 256
279 What is included under the Condition Group 315
280 What is the Price Analysis
281 What is the use
282 When is it possible to use it
316 TCRM20
- 257
283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on
a BTr) has the Pricing Process
284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM
317 TCRM20
- 258
285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination
286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component
performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the
Output
287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE
318 TCRM20
- 259
288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which
indentifies has each unit (3)
289 What does the hierarchical structure allow
290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20
- 284
291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341
292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342
293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the
billing
294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)
295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing
Doc
296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate
the financial Control on the Billing Docs
297 What is the CRM Billing Application
343 TCRM20
- 285
298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under
inputs Outputs
299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into
the Billing due List
300 What other options are there by the billing docs
344
301 What are the features of the input processing 345
302 What are the 4 billing methods
303 What is a billing document spilt
304 What is a billing document merge
346 TCRM20
- 289
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc
306 What are the data sources used during the billing process
307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What
is included in each part and what are its parameters
308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding
Billing Documents
309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed
310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc
347 TCRM20
- 291
311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System
and on which cases do you use each one
312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process
348
313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the
use of each
314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool
is used for this purpose
315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting
349 TCRM20
- 292
316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan
317 Which kinds of billing plans are there
318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of
319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan
320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned
350 TCRM20
- 293
321 What is the Billing Unit
322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units
323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to
extract the information
324 To which system object is the BU assigned
351 TCRM20
- 296
325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document
326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system
Object is it defined
327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat
328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination
329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on
another document
330 What is the Billing Relevance
331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process
332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process
333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On
what is it based
352 TCRM20
- 298
334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the
ERP
335 How is it customized on the system
336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document
353 TCRM20
- 299
337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20
- 300
338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 302
339 What are the Middleware Objectives
340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his
features
341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW
connection in order to communicate with the CRM
374
375
TCRM20
- 321
342 What is the SMQ12
343 What is the TRFC
344 How the Queues are processed
345 What is the Scheduler
TCRM20
- 321
346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20
- 326
347 Where is the MW software installed
348 What is included in the CRM Server
349 What are the MW objectives (3)
TCRM20
- 327
350 Which technology runs the process 376
351 What is the Objective of the BDoc
352 What is a BDoc Type
353 What is a BDoc Instance
354 What is a BDoc message
355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc
377
378
TCRM20
- 350
356 Describe the out bounding Process
357 Describe the Inbounding Process
358 What is the use of the Queue
359 What is the administration console
360 What is the validation process
379
361 What is the Objective of the Object management
362 What is the use
363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs
380
364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and
what are the data transfer restrictions
365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and
the CRM
381
366 What is the objective of the data load
367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load
368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)
369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO
370 What is the delta Load
382
371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383
372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20
- 347
373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20
- 348
374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibility of the Administration Console
375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc
376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc
377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc
386
378 What is the Data Integrity Manager
379 What is its use
387
380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and
relation between systems (6)
388
381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc
382 What are the options for debugging
391
383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the
SAP GUI
408
384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client
385 Which configuration tools are there
409
386 What are the different Business Roles (7)
387 Where are they defined
410
388 What are the different areas on the Screen
389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective
TCRM20
- 569
390 What is personalize
391 What is Help Center
392 What is System News
393 What is Central Search
TCRM20
- 570
394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20
- 571
395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles
396 To Which System Element we assign a User
411
397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412
398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR
399 What determines what will on the NB
413
400 What is the use of the Work Center
401 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 572
402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20
- 573
403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage
404 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 574
405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20
- 575
406 What is the use of the Calendar
407 What are the configuration options
TCRM20
- 576
408 Which system could be synched with the Email application
409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding
the Emails
410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which
logical links are there (4)
414 TCRM20
- 578
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center
412 What determines the Work Center
413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the
different between them
414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports
TCRM20
- 579
415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20
- 580
416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20
- 581
417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20
- 586
418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20
- 587
419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)
420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the
assignment block (4)
TCRM20
- 588
421 What is the second view possibility on the UI
422 For what is it used
423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view
424 Who may use this view
TCRM20
- 589
425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20
- 590
426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)
427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display
428 Give examples for Hierarchies
TCRM20
- 591
429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415
430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417
431 What is the role configuration key
432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key
419
433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench
434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed
by the EEWB
435 What is the user application of the EEWB
436 What is the advantage of the EEWB
437 What is the influence on other systems
421
438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422
439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20
- 613
440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each
441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user
442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model
TCRM20
- 615
443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)
444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links
445 What are the customization options of the NB profile
TCRM20
- 617
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
2 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Itay Abuhav
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
1 What are the key Functions in SAP CRM
2 What are the contact channels on SAP CRM
11
3 In which ways can the different SAP CRM applications be integrated in the
organization (5)
12
4 Which middleware components are to be installed in order to realize the
connection between the SAP CRM server and the ERP server (two
components)
13
5 Which interface is common and recommended for the CRM end users 17
6 What is Customization in a SAP system
7 What characterizes the Customization in SAP system (2)
8 What options have we in order to optimize customers requirements
specification on the SAP system
18
9 What is Transaction SPRO 21
10 Where do you change the design view setting (like layouts and font) on the
Web Client
22
11 What are the relevant terms for Business Partners (3)
12 How are the numbers of the entities determined
33
13 What is the main objective of a business partner
14 What is the difference between CRM Business partner model and other
ERP systems
15 What serves the business partner relationship definitions (roles) of a
business partner
34
16 What are the business partner categories
17 What is a business partner group
18 Who can be included as a business partner on the system
19 What is the meaning of an organization definition for a business partner
35
20 What is the meaning of business partner role
21 How many roles could be assigned to one business partner
36
22 What is the Objective of the BP relationship
23 What are the Attributes of a Relationship
37
24 What types of business partner relationships the system maintains
25 What is the purpose of a Relationship category
38
26 What is the BAS What are the objectives of BAS 39
27 To whom we define the marketing attributes
28 What is the Objective of the marketing attributes
29 What is the use of the marketing attributes (2)
40
30 What is the account classification What includes the account
classification
31 What is the use of account classification
32 How do you classify an account
41
33 To Which System object we assign the Lifecycle 43
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
3 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
34 What is the use of the Lifecycle Management
35 What is the relation between the Account lifecycle and the role
36 What is the relation between the Account lifecycle and the BP
37 How do you implement the lifecycle in the system transactions 44
38 What does the lifecycle determines when assigned to an entity
39 What is the relation between lifecycle and exclusion group
45
40 What is the use of mini templates
41 To which data are the mini templates assigned
42 What is the use of the Buying Center
43 To which System entity the Buying center is assigned
47
44 What are the Hierarchy nodes
45 What is the relation between a node from the ERP system and one form the
CRM
48
46 What are the hierarchy nodes Categories
47 What is the difference between them
48 What is the mobility policy in a node
49
49 Which methods there are for creating or updating BP master data in the
system (6)
50
50 What is the main difference between CRM and SAP ERP system when
handling a BP
51 What other differences are mentioned (4)
51
52 What is the main different between the CRM and the ERP when managing
BP
53 What is the basis for the difference
52
54 What is the purpose and advantages of the Easy Enhancement
Workbench
54
55 What are the Objectives of the Organizational Management
56 What is the relation between the SAP ERP and the CRM on the
organizational model
57 How the organizational Determination contributes the processes
80
58 What the three uses of the Organizational Management 81
59 What is the principle of Organizational Management 82
60 What are the suggested attributes of the CRM Organizational Model (5) 83
61 Which are the types of organizational Objects and what is the difference
between them
62 What are the attributes of each Organizational Object
84
63 What is the use of the General Attributes
64 What is the relation between the Org Unit and the position regarding the
Attributes
85
65 What are the Sales Functions on the organizational structure and their
responsibilities
66 Which one is the mandatory Function
67 What is the main difference between the various org objects
86
68 What are the service Functions on the organizational structure and their 87
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
4 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibilities
69 Which one is the mandatory Function
70 What is the main difference between the various org objects
71 What is the Marketing Functions on the organizational structure
72 What functions the Marketing organization allows us
73 What is its significance in compare with Sales and Services
88
74 What are the two methods to determine Organizational data to a
transaction
91
75 How does the system locate data and from where for realizing a
Transaction
76 Which two Kinds of rules guide the system when determining the data for
Transactions
77 Why is it required to determine certain rules to certain transactions
92
78 What is the system process flow of the Organizational data determination
79 What is the sequence of configuration flow of the Organizational data
determination
95
80 What are the product types in the CRM system (6)
81 What kinds of product data can be transferred from the ERP to the CRM
82 What is the reason that the data cannot be changed
111 TCRM10
ndash 481
83 What option is there to changes unchangeable product data on the CRM
system that sourced from the ERP
84 What is the sequence of creating a product on the ERP and transferring it to
the CRM and which system middle is required
113 TCRM10
- 482
85 What is the objective of the relationship
86 What are Accessories Customers products Vendors products Service
Products Spare part product Component products Warranties
87 Which system condition should be maintained in order to set the relationship
type
114 TCRM10
- 482
88 What are the Objectives of a Competitor Product
89 What is the use of the competitor product
90 What kind of Product type is a Competitor Product
91 Which transaction can use the competitor product
115 TCRM10
-484
92 What is the hierarchy of product definition
93 What is the definition and purpose of a Set Type
94 What are the Set Type elements
95 Which kind of set types has the product master and what each one
contains
116 TCRM10
- 490
96 What is the basic Set Type definition and Hierarchies for a product on the
CRM System
97 What is the sequence of transferring product from the ERP to the CRM
98 What is the requirement for Material product that was transferred from the
ERP
99 What is the significance of assigning a product to the product type
100 What is the difference between the hierarchy assignment to the different
product types in the CRM system And why
117
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
5 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
101 What is the different type of service products
102 What is the Warranty product and which kind of warranty product there
are
118 TCRM10
- 492
103 What is the objective on an Attribute
104 What are the parameters that define Attribute
105 What are the Objective of Set types
106 Which options are there for Set types uses
107 What is the set type restriction
108 Which Object is assigned to another
109 What are the mini templates
119 TCRM10
- 493
110 What enables the Product Category
111 What is the Objective of Product Category
112 Describe the logic behind the structure of Hierarchies and Product
Category and set type What is the role of the set type
120 TCRM10
ndash 493
113 What are the various elements necessary to enhance a Product 121 TCRM10
ndash 493
114 What is an Adapter Object
115 What is the two required downloads when replicating data from the ERP
to the CRM
122 TCRM10
- 493
116 What are the Objectives (3) of a Transaction
117 What are the options between various transactions (3)
151 TCRM20
-1 ndash 17
118 What are the two different areas on a transaction and what is the
difference between them
119 What is the use of a BTr
120 What is the use of the BTr Type
121 What is the additional level that a sales BTr has Which check is
required to operate this level
152 TCRM20
-1 - 18
122 What is determined when a TrTy is set for a BTr What are the three
elements
123 Name a few of the Transactions Characteristics
124 What is the restriction when working with a BTr regarding follow ups
125 What is the objective of a TrTy
126 What are the Blocking Reasons Where is it defined
127 What is the use of the permission channels
153 TCRM20
ndash 19 - 51
128 What triggers the Item Category
129 What are the attributes determined by the Item Category
130 Which data and profiles are fixed on an Item Category and what
resembles these data For which type of information are they divided
131 Which data is then determined and what resembles these data
154 TCRM20
ndash 20-54
132 What is the Item Category Group Where is it defined
133 What is the sequence of the item category determination
134 What is the condition regarding the item category determination when
replicating information from the ERP to the CRM Why
155 TCRM20
- 54
135 How the system does determine the Item Category
136 What are the options for Item category determination aside from the
156 TCRM20
- 55
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
6 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
default ones
137 What are the two options to maintain Preceding and subsequent
Documents
138 What is necessary in order to carry them out
139 What is the restriction when performing a copy control for a Transaction
157 TCRM20
- 93
140 What is the objective Transaction History
141 What is the difference between different kinds of transactions
142 What does the Transaction History allow
143 What triggers the transaction History
158 TCRM20
ndash 95
144 What is the sequence of the copy control
145 In Which cases the Copy control is mandatory
146 What is the case with Service when performing copy control
159 TCRM20
- 97
147 What is linking a document subsequently
148 What is copied and what is not copied when linking a document
subsequently
149 What is updated when the subsequent link was done
150 Which profile is required in order to allow a subsequent link
160 TCRM20
- 98
151 What are the Basic Functions in a BTr and what is the objective and use
of each (profiles)
161 TCRM20
- 98
152 What are the notes Which kinds of notes the system offers
153 What are the notes features
154 To which SO can these notes be maintained
162 TCRM20
- 99
155 How looks the Hierarchy of the TDP
156 What is determined for the Text under the TDP
157 To which SO assign one the TDP
163 TCRM20
- 100
158 What is the Objective of the Date Management
159 In which cases the Date Management is usable
160 For which BTr the date management is used
161 What are the characteristics of the Date Management
162 According to which System Object the Date Management rule is
determined
164 TCRM20
- 102
163 What are Date Types
164 What are durations
165 What are the date rules
165 TCRM20
- 103
166 What is the objective of the status management and what is the use
167 What Kind of System Statuses are managed on the System
168 What are the User Status restriction regarding a BTr
169 What are the User Status options regarding a User
166 TCRM20
- 104
170 Which system Objects determine the status Profile
171 What is necessary to define and activate a status profile on the system
172 What is a status number
173 What is determined when a status profile is called Which another
system rule is then required
167 TCRM20
- 105
174 What is the Objective Incompleteness Check
175 What is the use of the Incompleteness Check
168 TCRM20
- 107
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
7 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
176 What is the hierarchy of the Incompleteness Process To which system
object is it assigned
177 What is the objective of the Change History What are the three
parameters
178 Where is the Change History defined
170 TCRM20
- 130
179 What is the Objective of the activity
180 What kinds of Activities are there in the System
181 What characterizes an Activity What is the difference from other BTr
(3)
182 What are the two leading Business Transactions Categories for activities
that are defined in the System What is the difference between them
183 What is the relation between activities and other BTr
217 TCRM20
- 131
184 What is the Business Activity Structure And what is included
185 What is the relation between the activity Category and the Transaction
Type
218
186 What is included under the default data on the activity TrTy
187 What is required in order to add product to activities
219 TCRM20
- 136
188 What are the options for Follow-up Activities on the System What is the
difference between them
220 TCRM20
- 137
189 What are the characteristics of a questionnaire 221 TCRM20
- 137
190 What is the main purpose of the Activity Journal
191 What is the use of the Journal Activity
192 What is required in order to track Products
193 What is the relation with other TrTy
222 TCRM20
- 140
194 What is the objective of the connection between the CRM System and
the groupware
195 What is the use of the groupware application
196 What is required when defining the groupware
197 What are the system requirements for operating the groupware
223 TCRM20
- 142
198 What are the Objects that could be transferred between the CRM and a
Groupware System
199 Which Technology Elements are used to execute this option What
components are required
224 TCRM20
- 144
200 What is the activity analysis
201 What is necessary in order to be able to create reports
225
202 What is the objective of the PP
203 What is the use of the PP (5)
204 What are the most important sources of information are in the PP
243 TCRM20
- 168
205 What triggers the PP
206 What is the process sequence of the PP
244 TCRM20
- 169
207 What are the four principles of the PP (for data entering for document
for process)
245 TCRM20
- 171
208 What is the Partner Function Category 246 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
209 What is the Partner Function
210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure
211 What is the Access Sequence
- 176
212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner
Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner
Function Category and the Partner Function
213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the
Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the
connection to the Access sequence
214 What is the use of the Lock
215 What is the Undefined Partner
247 TCRM20
- 178
216 What is the Objective of the PDP
217 What is the use of the PDP
218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP
219 What type of data the PDP brings
220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)
221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)
222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure
248 TCRM20
- 179
223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence
224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it
referring
225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined
249 TCRM20
- 180
226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a
process in the system
227 What are the parameters checked by the AS
228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in
order to relate a PDP to a TrTy
229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is
assigned to him
250 TCRM20
- 181
230 What is the purpose of actions on the System
231 What is the use of actions on the System
232 What is the terminology for the actions processing
273 TCRM20
- 207
233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action
234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned
235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile
236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the
execution of actions
274 TCRM20
- 208
237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System
and what is the relation between them
238 For which SO are the conditions assigned
239 What are the two mode of defining them
275 TCRM20
- 209
240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time
241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the
difference between them (3) Give examples for each
242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time
276 TCRM20
- 210
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown
244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of
each one
277 TCRM20
- 211
245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition
246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has
each
247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile
278 TCRM20
- 212
248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20
- 213
249 What is a Smart Form How does it work
250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on
the SAP Smart Form
281 TCRM20
- 215
251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor
252 Where is it originated
253 What is the use of the action monitor
254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report
282 TCRM20
- 215
255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System
On which technology is it based
256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the
relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)
257 What is the use of the PP
258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing
possibilities with it
259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the
CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm
305 TCRM20
- 243
260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the
difference between them
306 TCRM20
- 244
261 What is the logic structure of the PP
262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the
use calculation )
307 TCRM20
- 245
263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing
Procedure (5)
308 TCRM20
- 246
264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it
operative
265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty
309 TCRM20
- 248
266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access
267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty
268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a
Con Is operated
269 What is a condition record
310 TCRM20
- 249
270 What is the Condition Tables
271 How does the condition Table is activated
272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table
311 TCRM20
- 250
273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251
275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure
276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of
pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other
possibilities are
277 What is the Value scale
313 TCRM20
- 255
278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20
- 256
279 What is included under the Condition Group 315
280 What is the Price Analysis
281 What is the use
282 When is it possible to use it
316 TCRM20
- 257
283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on
a BTr) has the Pricing Process
284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM
317 TCRM20
- 258
285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination
286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component
performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the
Output
287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE
318 TCRM20
- 259
288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which
indentifies has each unit (3)
289 What does the hierarchical structure allow
290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20
- 284
291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341
292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342
293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the
billing
294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)
295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing
Doc
296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate
the financial Control on the Billing Docs
297 What is the CRM Billing Application
343 TCRM20
- 285
298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under
inputs Outputs
299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into
the Billing due List
300 What other options are there by the billing docs
344
301 What are the features of the input processing 345
302 What are the 4 billing methods
303 What is a billing document spilt
304 What is a billing document merge
346 TCRM20
- 289
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc
306 What are the data sources used during the billing process
307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What
is included in each part and what are its parameters
308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding
Billing Documents
309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed
310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc
347 TCRM20
- 291
311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System
and on which cases do you use each one
312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process
348
313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the
use of each
314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool
is used for this purpose
315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting
349 TCRM20
- 292
316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan
317 Which kinds of billing plans are there
318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of
319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan
320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned
350 TCRM20
- 293
321 What is the Billing Unit
322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units
323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to
extract the information
324 To which system object is the BU assigned
351 TCRM20
- 296
325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document
326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system
Object is it defined
327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat
328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination
329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on
another document
330 What is the Billing Relevance
331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process
332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process
333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On
what is it based
352 TCRM20
- 298
334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the
ERP
335 How is it customized on the system
336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document
353 TCRM20
- 299
337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20
- 300
338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 302
339 What are the Middleware Objectives
340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his
features
341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW
connection in order to communicate with the CRM
374
375
TCRM20
- 321
342 What is the SMQ12
343 What is the TRFC
344 How the Queues are processed
345 What is the Scheduler
TCRM20
- 321
346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20
- 326
347 Where is the MW software installed
348 What is included in the CRM Server
349 What are the MW objectives (3)
TCRM20
- 327
350 Which technology runs the process 376
351 What is the Objective of the BDoc
352 What is a BDoc Type
353 What is a BDoc Instance
354 What is a BDoc message
355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc
377
378
TCRM20
- 350
356 Describe the out bounding Process
357 Describe the Inbounding Process
358 What is the use of the Queue
359 What is the administration console
360 What is the validation process
379
361 What is the Objective of the Object management
362 What is the use
363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs
380
364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and
what are the data transfer restrictions
365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and
the CRM
381
366 What is the objective of the data load
367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load
368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)
369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO
370 What is the delta Load
382
371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383
372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20
- 347
373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20
- 348
374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibility of the Administration Console
375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc
376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc
377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc
386
378 What is the Data Integrity Manager
379 What is its use
387
380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and
relation between systems (6)
388
381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc
382 What are the options for debugging
391
383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the
SAP GUI
408
384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client
385 Which configuration tools are there
409
386 What are the different Business Roles (7)
387 Where are they defined
410
388 What are the different areas on the Screen
389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective
TCRM20
- 569
390 What is personalize
391 What is Help Center
392 What is System News
393 What is Central Search
TCRM20
- 570
394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20
- 571
395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles
396 To Which System Element we assign a User
411
397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412
398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR
399 What determines what will on the NB
413
400 What is the use of the Work Center
401 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 572
402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20
- 573
403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage
404 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 574
405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20
- 575
406 What is the use of the Calendar
407 What are the configuration options
TCRM20
- 576
408 Which system could be synched with the Email application
409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding
the Emails
410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which
logical links are there (4)
414 TCRM20
- 578
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center
412 What determines the Work Center
413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the
different between them
414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports
TCRM20
- 579
415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20
- 580
416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20
- 581
417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20
- 586
418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20
- 587
419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)
420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the
assignment block (4)
TCRM20
- 588
421 What is the second view possibility on the UI
422 For what is it used
423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view
424 Who may use this view
TCRM20
- 589
425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20
- 590
426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)
427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display
428 Give examples for Hierarchies
TCRM20
- 591
429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415
430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417
431 What is the role configuration key
432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key
419
433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench
434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed
by the EEWB
435 What is the user application of the EEWB
436 What is the advantage of the EEWB
437 What is the influence on other systems
421
438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422
439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20
- 613
440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each
441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user
442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model
TCRM20
- 615
443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)
444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links
445 What are the customization options of the NB profile
TCRM20
- 617
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
3 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
34 What is the use of the Lifecycle Management
35 What is the relation between the Account lifecycle and the role
36 What is the relation between the Account lifecycle and the BP
37 How do you implement the lifecycle in the system transactions 44
38 What does the lifecycle determines when assigned to an entity
39 What is the relation between lifecycle and exclusion group
45
40 What is the use of mini templates
41 To which data are the mini templates assigned
42 What is the use of the Buying Center
43 To which System entity the Buying center is assigned
47
44 What are the Hierarchy nodes
45 What is the relation between a node from the ERP system and one form the
CRM
48
46 What are the hierarchy nodes Categories
47 What is the difference between them
48 What is the mobility policy in a node
49
49 Which methods there are for creating or updating BP master data in the
system (6)
50
50 What is the main difference between CRM and SAP ERP system when
handling a BP
51 What other differences are mentioned (4)
51
52 What is the main different between the CRM and the ERP when managing
BP
53 What is the basis for the difference
52
54 What is the purpose and advantages of the Easy Enhancement
Workbench
54
55 What are the Objectives of the Organizational Management
56 What is the relation between the SAP ERP and the CRM on the
organizational model
57 How the organizational Determination contributes the processes
80
58 What the three uses of the Organizational Management 81
59 What is the principle of Organizational Management 82
60 What are the suggested attributes of the CRM Organizational Model (5) 83
61 Which are the types of organizational Objects and what is the difference
between them
62 What are the attributes of each Organizational Object
84
63 What is the use of the General Attributes
64 What is the relation between the Org Unit and the position regarding the
Attributes
85
65 What are the Sales Functions on the organizational structure and their
responsibilities
66 Which one is the mandatory Function
67 What is the main difference between the various org objects
86
68 What are the service Functions on the organizational structure and their 87
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
4 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibilities
69 Which one is the mandatory Function
70 What is the main difference between the various org objects
71 What is the Marketing Functions on the organizational structure
72 What functions the Marketing organization allows us
73 What is its significance in compare with Sales and Services
88
74 What are the two methods to determine Organizational data to a
transaction
91
75 How does the system locate data and from where for realizing a
Transaction
76 Which two Kinds of rules guide the system when determining the data for
Transactions
77 Why is it required to determine certain rules to certain transactions
92
78 What is the system process flow of the Organizational data determination
79 What is the sequence of configuration flow of the Organizational data
determination
95
80 What are the product types in the CRM system (6)
81 What kinds of product data can be transferred from the ERP to the CRM
82 What is the reason that the data cannot be changed
111 TCRM10
ndash 481
83 What option is there to changes unchangeable product data on the CRM
system that sourced from the ERP
84 What is the sequence of creating a product on the ERP and transferring it to
the CRM and which system middle is required
113 TCRM10
- 482
85 What is the objective of the relationship
86 What are Accessories Customers products Vendors products Service
Products Spare part product Component products Warranties
87 Which system condition should be maintained in order to set the relationship
type
114 TCRM10
- 482
88 What are the Objectives of a Competitor Product
89 What is the use of the competitor product
90 What kind of Product type is a Competitor Product
91 Which transaction can use the competitor product
115 TCRM10
-484
92 What is the hierarchy of product definition
93 What is the definition and purpose of a Set Type
94 What are the Set Type elements
95 Which kind of set types has the product master and what each one
contains
116 TCRM10
- 490
96 What is the basic Set Type definition and Hierarchies for a product on the
CRM System
97 What is the sequence of transferring product from the ERP to the CRM
98 What is the requirement for Material product that was transferred from the
ERP
99 What is the significance of assigning a product to the product type
100 What is the difference between the hierarchy assignment to the different
product types in the CRM system And why
117
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
5 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
101 What is the different type of service products
102 What is the Warranty product and which kind of warranty product there
are
118 TCRM10
- 492
103 What is the objective on an Attribute
104 What are the parameters that define Attribute
105 What are the Objective of Set types
106 Which options are there for Set types uses
107 What is the set type restriction
108 Which Object is assigned to another
109 What are the mini templates
119 TCRM10
- 493
110 What enables the Product Category
111 What is the Objective of Product Category
112 Describe the logic behind the structure of Hierarchies and Product
Category and set type What is the role of the set type
120 TCRM10
ndash 493
113 What are the various elements necessary to enhance a Product 121 TCRM10
ndash 493
114 What is an Adapter Object
115 What is the two required downloads when replicating data from the ERP
to the CRM
122 TCRM10
- 493
116 What are the Objectives (3) of a Transaction
117 What are the options between various transactions (3)
151 TCRM20
-1 ndash 17
118 What are the two different areas on a transaction and what is the
difference between them
119 What is the use of a BTr
120 What is the use of the BTr Type
121 What is the additional level that a sales BTr has Which check is
required to operate this level
152 TCRM20
-1 - 18
122 What is determined when a TrTy is set for a BTr What are the three
elements
123 Name a few of the Transactions Characteristics
124 What is the restriction when working with a BTr regarding follow ups
125 What is the objective of a TrTy
126 What are the Blocking Reasons Where is it defined
127 What is the use of the permission channels
153 TCRM20
ndash 19 - 51
128 What triggers the Item Category
129 What are the attributes determined by the Item Category
130 Which data and profiles are fixed on an Item Category and what
resembles these data For which type of information are they divided
131 Which data is then determined and what resembles these data
154 TCRM20
ndash 20-54
132 What is the Item Category Group Where is it defined
133 What is the sequence of the item category determination
134 What is the condition regarding the item category determination when
replicating information from the ERP to the CRM Why
155 TCRM20
- 54
135 How the system does determine the Item Category
136 What are the options for Item category determination aside from the
156 TCRM20
- 55
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
6 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
default ones
137 What are the two options to maintain Preceding and subsequent
Documents
138 What is necessary in order to carry them out
139 What is the restriction when performing a copy control for a Transaction
157 TCRM20
- 93
140 What is the objective Transaction History
141 What is the difference between different kinds of transactions
142 What does the Transaction History allow
143 What triggers the transaction History
158 TCRM20
ndash 95
144 What is the sequence of the copy control
145 In Which cases the Copy control is mandatory
146 What is the case with Service when performing copy control
159 TCRM20
- 97
147 What is linking a document subsequently
148 What is copied and what is not copied when linking a document
subsequently
149 What is updated when the subsequent link was done
150 Which profile is required in order to allow a subsequent link
160 TCRM20
- 98
151 What are the Basic Functions in a BTr and what is the objective and use
of each (profiles)
161 TCRM20
- 98
152 What are the notes Which kinds of notes the system offers
153 What are the notes features
154 To which SO can these notes be maintained
162 TCRM20
- 99
155 How looks the Hierarchy of the TDP
156 What is determined for the Text under the TDP
157 To which SO assign one the TDP
163 TCRM20
- 100
158 What is the Objective of the Date Management
159 In which cases the Date Management is usable
160 For which BTr the date management is used
161 What are the characteristics of the Date Management
162 According to which System Object the Date Management rule is
determined
164 TCRM20
- 102
163 What are Date Types
164 What are durations
165 What are the date rules
165 TCRM20
- 103
166 What is the objective of the status management and what is the use
167 What Kind of System Statuses are managed on the System
168 What are the User Status restriction regarding a BTr
169 What are the User Status options regarding a User
166 TCRM20
- 104
170 Which system Objects determine the status Profile
171 What is necessary to define and activate a status profile on the system
172 What is a status number
173 What is determined when a status profile is called Which another
system rule is then required
167 TCRM20
- 105
174 What is the Objective Incompleteness Check
175 What is the use of the Incompleteness Check
168 TCRM20
- 107
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
7 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
176 What is the hierarchy of the Incompleteness Process To which system
object is it assigned
177 What is the objective of the Change History What are the three
parameters
178 Where is the Change History defined
170 TCRM20
- 130
179 What is the Objective of the activity
180 What kinds of Activities are there in the System
181 What characterizes an Activity What is the difference from other BTr
(3)
182 What are the two leading Business Transactions Categories for activities
that are defined in the System What is the difference between them
183 What is the relation between activities and other BTr
217 TCRM20
- 131
184 What is the Business Activity Structure And what is included
185 What is the relation between the activity Category and the Transaction
Type
218
186 What is included under the default data on the activity TrTy
187 What is required in order to add product to activities
219 TCRM20
- 136
188 What are the options for Follow-up Activities on the System What is the
difference between them
220 TCRM20
- 137
189 What are the characteristics of a questionnaire 221 TCRM20
- 137
190 What is the main purpose of the Activity Journal
191 What is the use of the Journal Activity
192 What is required in order to track Products
193 What is the relation with other TrTy
222 TCRM20
- 140
194 What is the objective of the connection between the CRM System and
the groupware
195 What is the use of the groupware application
196 What is required when defining the groupware
197 What are the system requirements for operating the groupware
223 TCRM20
- 142
198 What are the Objects that could be transferred between the CRM and a
Groupware System
199 Which Technology Elements are used to execute this option What
components are required
224 TCRM20
- 144
200 What is the activity analysis
201 What is necessary in order to be able to create reports
225
202 What is the objective of the PP
203 What is the use of the PP (5)
204 What are the most important sources of information are in the PP
243 TCRM20
- 168
205 What triggers the PP
206 What is the process sequence of the PP
244 TCRM20
- 169
207 What are the four principles of the PP (for data entering for document
for process)
245 TCRM20
- 171
208 What is the Partner Function Category 246 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
209 What is the Partner Function
210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure
211 What is the Access Sequence
- 176
212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner
Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner
Function Category and the Partner Function
213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the
Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the
connection to the Access sequence
214 What is the use of the Lock
215 What is the Undefined Partner
247 TCRM20
- 178
216 What is the Objective of the PDP
217 What is the use of the PDP
218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP
219 What type of data the PDP brings
220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)
221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)
222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure
248 TCRM20
- 179
223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence
224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it
referring
225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined
249 TCRM20
- 180
226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a
process in the system
227 What are the parameters checked by the AS
228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in
order to relate a PDP to a TrTy
229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is
assigned to him
250 TCRM20
- 181
230 What is the purpose of actions on the System
231 What is the use of actions on the System
232 What is the terminology for the actions processing
273 TCRM20
- 207
233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action
234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned
235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile
236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the
execution of actions
274 TCRM20
- 208
237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System
and what is the relation between them
238 For which SO are the conditions assigned
239 What are the two mode of defining them
275 TCRM20
- 209
240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time
241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the
difference between them (3) Give examples for each
242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time
276 TCRM20
- 210
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown
244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of
each one
277 TCRM20
- 211
245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition
246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has
each
247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile
278 TCRM20
- 212
248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20
- 213
249 What is a Smart Form How does it work
250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on
the SAP Smart Form
281 TCRM20
- 215
251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor
252 Where is it originated
253 What is the use of the action monitor
254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report
282 TCRM20
- 215
255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System
On which technology is it based
256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the
relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)
257 What is the use of the PP
258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing
possibilities with it
259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the
CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm
305 TCRM20
- 243
260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the
difference between them
306 TCRM20
- 244
261 What is the logic structure of the PP
262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the
use calculation )
307 TCRM20
- 245
263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing
Procedure (5)
308 TCRM20
- 246
264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it
operative
265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty
309 TCRM20
- 248
266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access
267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty
268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a
Con Is operated
269 What is a condition record
310 TCRM20
- 249
270 What is the Condition Tables
271 How does the condition Table is activated
272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table
311 TCRM20
- 250
273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251
275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure
276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of
pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other
possibilities are
277 What is the Value scale
313 TCRM20
- 255
278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20
- 256
279 What is included under the Condition Group 315
280 What is the Price Analysis
281 What is the use
282 When is it possible to use it
316 TCRM20
- 257
283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on
a BTr) has the Pricing Process
284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM
317 TCRM20
- 258
285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination
286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component
performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the
Output
287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE
318 TCRM20
- 259
288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which
indentifies has each unit (3)
289 What does the hierarchical structure allow
290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20
- 284
291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341
292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342
293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the
billing
294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)
295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing
Doc
296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate
the financial Control on the Billing Docs
297 What is the CRM Billing Application
343 TCRM20
- 285
298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under
inputs Outputs
299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into
the Billing due List
300 What other options are there by the billing docs
344
301 What are the features of the input processing 345
302 What are the 4 billing methods
303 What is a billing document spilt
304 What is a billing document merge
346 TCRM20
- 289
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc
306 What are the data sources used during the billing process
307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What
is included in each part and what are its parameters
308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding
Billing Documents
309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed
310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc
347 TCRM20
- 291
311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System
and on which cases do you use each one
312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process
348
313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the
use of each
314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool
is used for this purpose
315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting
349 TCRM20
- 292
316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan
317 Which kinds of billing plans are there
318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of
319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan
320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned
350 TCRM20
- 293
321 What is the Billing Unit
322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units
323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to
extract the information
324 To which system object is the BU assigned
351 TCRM20
- 296
325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document
326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system
Object is it defined
327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat
328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination
329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on
another document
330 What is the Billing Relevance
331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process
332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process
333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On
what is it based
352 TCRM20
- 298
334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the
ERP
335 How is it customized on the system
336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document
353 TCRM20
- 299
337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20
- 300
338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 302
339 What are the Middleware Objectives
340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his
features
341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW
connection in order to communicate with the CRM
374
375
TCRM20
- 321
342 What is the SMQ12
343 What is the TRFC
344 How the Queues are processed
345 What is the Scheduler
TCRM20
- 321
346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20
- 326
347 Where is the MW software installed
348 What is included in the CRM Server
349 What are the MW objectives (3)
TCRM20
- 327
350 Which technology runs the process 376
351 What is the Objective of the BDoc
352 What is a BDoc Type
353 What is a BDoc Instance
354 What is a BDoc message
355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc
377
378
TCRM20
- 350
356 Describe the out bounding Process
357 Describe the Inbounding Process
358 What is the use of the Queue
359 What is the administration console
360 What is the validation process
379
361 What is the Objective of the Object management
362 What is the use
363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs
380
364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and
what are the data transfer restrictions
365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and
the CRM
381
366 What is the objective of the data load
367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load
368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)
369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO
370 What is the delta Load
382
371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383
372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20
- 347
373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20
- 348
374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibility of the Administration Console
375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc
376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc
377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc
386
378 What is the Data Integrity Manager
379 What is its use
387
380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and
relation between systems (6)
388
381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc
382 What are the options for debugging
391
383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the
SAP GUI
408
384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client
385 Which configuration tools are there
409
386 What are the different Business Roles (7)
387 Where are they defined
410
388 What are the different areas on the Screen
389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective
TCRM20
- 569
390 What is personalize
391 What is Help Center
392 What is System News
393 What is Central Search
TCRM20
- 570
394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20
- 571
395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles
396 To Which System Element we assign a User
411
397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412
398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR
399 What determines what will on the NB
413
400 What is the use of the Work Center
401 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 572
402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20
- 573
403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage
404 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 574
405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20
- 575
406 What is the use of the Calendar
407 What are the configuration options
TCRM20
- 576
408 Which system could be synched with the Email application
409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding
the Emails
410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which
logical links are there (4)
414 TCRM20
- 578
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center
412 What determines the Work Center
413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the
different between them
414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports
TCRM20
- 579
415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20
- 580
416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20
- 581
417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20
- 586
418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20
- 587
419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)
420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the
assignment block (4)
TCRM20
- 588
421 What is the second view possibility on the UI
422 For what is it used
423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view
424 Who may use this view
TCRM20
- 589
425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20
- 590
426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)
427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display
428 Give examples for Hierarchies
TCRM20
- 591
429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415
430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417
431 What is the role configuration key
432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key
419
433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench
434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed
by the EEWB
435 What is the user application of the EEWB
436 What is the advantage of the EEWB
437 What is the influence on other systems
421
438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422
439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20
- 613
440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each
441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user
442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model
TCRM20
- 615
443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)
444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links
445 What are the customization options of the NB profile
TCRM20
- 617
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
4 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibilities
69 Which one is the mandatory Function
70 What is the main difference between the various org objects
71 What is the Marketing Functions on the organizational structure
72 What functions the Marketing organization allows us
73 What is its significance in compare with Sales and Services
88
74 What are the two methods to determine Organizational data to a
transaction
91
75 How does the system locate data and from where for realizing a
Transaction
76 Which two Kinds of rules guide the system when determining the data for
Transactions
77 Why is it required to determine certain rules to certain transactions
92
78 What is the system process flow of the Organizational data determination
79 What is the sequence of configuration flow of the Organizational data
determination
95
80 What are the product types in the CRM system (6)
81 What kinds of product data can be transferred from the ERP to the CRM
82 What is the reason that the data cannot be changed
111 TCRM10
ndash 481
83 What option is there to changes unchangeable product data on the CRM
system that sourced from the ERP
84 What is the sequence of creating a product on the ERP and transferring it to
the CRM and which system middle is required
113 TCRM10
- 482
85 What is the objective of the relationship
86 What are Accessories Customers products Vendors products Service
Products Spare part product Component products Warranties
87 Which system condition should be maintained in order to set the relationship
type
114 TCRM10
- 482
88 What are the Objectives of a Competitor Product
89 What is the use of the competitor product
90 What kind of Product type is a Competitor Product
91 Which transaction can use the competitor product
115 TCRM10
-484
92 What is the hierarchy of product definition
93 What is the definition and purpose of a Set Type
94 What are the Set Type elements
95 Which kind of set types has the product master and what each one
contains
116 TCRM10
- 490
96 What is the basic Set Type definition and Hierarchies for a product on the
CRM System
97 What is the sequence of transferring product from the ERP to the CRM
98 What is the requirement for Material product that was transferred from the
ERP
99 What is the significance of assigning a product to the product type
100 What is the difference between the hierarchy assignment to the different
product types in the CRM system And why
117
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
5 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
101 What is the different type of service products
102 What is the Warranty product and which kind of warranty product there
are
118 TCRM10
- 492
103 What is the objective on an Attribute
104 What are the parameters that define Attribute
105 What are the Objective of Set types
106 Which options are there for Set types uses
107 What is the set type restriction
108 Which Object is assigned to another
109 What are the mini templates
119 TCRM10
- 493
110 What enables the Product Category
111 What is the Objective of Product Category
112 Describe the logic behind the structure of Hierarchies and Product
Category and set type What is the role of the set type
120 TCRM10
ndash 493
113 What are the various elements necessary to enhance a Product 121 TCRM10
ndash 493
114 What is an Adapter Object
115 What is the two required downloads when replicating data from the ERP
to the CRM
122 TCRM10
- 493
116 What are the Objectives (3) of a Transaction
117 What are the options between various transactions (3)
151 TCRM20
-1 ndash 17
118 What are the two different areas on a transaction and what is the
difference between them
119 What is the use of a BTr
120 What is the use of the BTr Type
121 What is the additional level that a sales BTr has Which check is
required to operate this level
152 TCRM20
-1 - 18
122 What is determined when a TrTy is set for a BTr What are the three
elements
123 Name a few of the Transactions Characteristics
124 What is the restriction when working with a BTr regarding follow ups
125 What is the objective of a TrTy
126 What are the Blocking Reasons Where is it defined
127 What is the use of the permission channels
153 TCRM20
ndash 19 - 51
128 What triggers the Item Category
129 What are the attributes determined by the Item Category
130 Which data and profiles are fixed on an Item Category and what
resembles these data For which type of information are they divided
131 Which data is then determined and what resembles these data
154 TCRM20
ndash 20-54
132 What is the Item Category Group Where is it defined
133 What is the sequence of the item category determination
134 What is the condition regarding the item category determination when
replicating information from the ERP to the CRM Why
155 TCRM20
- 54
135 How the system does determine the Item Category
136 What are the options for Item category determination aside from the
156 TCRM20
- 55
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
6 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
default ones
137 What are the two options to maintain Preceding and subsequent
Documents
138 What is necessary in order to carry them out
139 What is the restriction when performing a copy control for a Transaction
157 TCRM20
- 93
140 What is the objective Transaction History
141 What is the difference between different kinds of transactions
142 What does the Transaction History allow
143 What triggers the transaction History
158 TCRM20
ndash 95
144 What is the sequence of the copy control
145 In Which cases the Copy control is mandatory
146 What is the case with Service when performing copy control
159 TCRM20
- 97
147 What is linking a document subsequently
148 What is copied and what is not copied when linking a document
subsequently
149 What is updated when the subsequent link was done
150 Which profile is required in order to allow a subsequent link
160 TCRM20
- 98
151 What are the Basic Functions in a BTr and what is the objective and use
of each (profiles)
161 TCRM20
- 98
152 What are the notes Which kinds of notes the system offers
153 What are the notes features
154 To which SO can these notes be maintained
162 TCRM20
- 99
155 How looks the Hierarchy of the TDP
156 What is determined for the Text under the TDP
157 To which SO assign one the TDP
163 TCRM20
- 100
158 What is the Objective of the Date Management
159 In which cases the Date Management is usable
160 For which BTr the date management is used
161 What are the characteristics of the Date Management
162 According to which System Object the Date Management rule is
determined
164 TCRM20
- 102
163 What are Date Types
164 What are durations
165 What are the date rules
165 TCRM20
- 103
166 What is the objective of the status management and what is the use
167 What Kind of System Statuses are managed on the System
168 What are the User Status restriction regarding a BTr
169 What are the User Status options regarding a User
166 TCRM20
- 104
170 Which system Objects determine the status Profile
171 What is necessary to define and activate a status profile on the system
172 What is a status number
173 What is determined when a status profile is called Which another
system rule is then required
167 TCRM20
- 105
174 What is the Objective Incompleteness Check
175 What is the use of the Incompleteness Check
168 TCRM20
- 107
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
7 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
176 What is the hierarchy of the Incompleteness Process To which system
object is it assigned
177 What is the objective of the Change History What are the three
parameters
178 Where is the Change History defined
170 TCRM20
- 130
179 What is the Objective of the activity
180 What kinds of Activities are there in the System
181 What characterizes an Activity What is the difference from other BTr
(3)
182 What are the two leading Business Transactions Categories for activities
that are defined in the System What is the difference between them
183 What is the relation between activities and other BTr
217 TCRM20
- 131
184 What is the Business Activity Structure And what is included
185 What is the relation between the activity Category and the Transaction
Type
218
186 What is included under the default data on the activity TrTy
187 What is required in order to add product to activities
219 TCRM20
- 136
188 What are the options for Follow-up Activities on the System What is the
difference between them
220 TCRM20
- 137
189 What are the characteristics of a questionnaire 221 TCRM20
- 137
190 What is the main purpose of the Activity Journal
191 What is the use of the Journal Activity
192 What is required in order to track Products
193 What is the relation with other TrTy
222 TCRM20
- 140
194 What is the objective of the connection between the CRM System and
the groupware
195 What is the use of the groupware application
196 What is required when defining the groupware
197 What are the system requirements for operating the groupware
223 TCRM20
- 142
198 What are the Objects that could be transferred between the CRM and a
Groupware System
199 Which Technology Elements are used to execute this option What
components are required
224 TCRM20
- 144
200 What is the activity analysis
201 What is necessary in order to be able to create reports
225
202 What is the objective of the PP
203 What is the use of the PP (5)
204 What are the most important sources of information are in the PP
243 TCRM20
- 168
205 What triggers the PP
206 What is the process sequence of the PP
244 TCRM20
- 169
207 What are the four principles of the PP (for data entering for document
for process)
245 TCRM20
- 171
208 What is the Partner Function Category 246 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
209 What is the Partner Function
210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure
211 What is the Access Sequence
- 176
212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner
Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner
Function Category and the Partner Function
213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the
Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the
connection to the Access sequence
214 What is the use of the Lock
215 What is the Undefined Partner
247 TCRM20
- 178
216 What is the Objective of the PDP
217 What is the use of the PDP
218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP
219 What type of data the PDP brings
220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)
221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)
222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure
248 TCRM20
- 179
223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence
224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it
referring
225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined
249 TCRM20
- 180
226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a
process in the system
227 What are the parameters checked by the AS
228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in
order to relate a PDP to a TrTy
229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is
assigned to him
250 TCRM20
- 181
230 What is the purpose of actions on the System
231 What is the use of actions on the System
232 What is the terminology for the actions processing
273 TCRM20
- 207
233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action
234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned
235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile
236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the
execution of actions
274 TCRM20
- 208
237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System
and what is the relation between them
238 For which SO are the conditions assigned
239 What are the two mode of defining them
275 TCRM20
- 209
240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time
241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the
difference between them (3) Give examples for each
242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time
276 TCRM20
- 210
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown
244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of
each one
277 TCRM20
- 211
245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition
246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has
each
247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile
278 TCRM20
- 212
248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20
- 213
249 What is a Smart Form How does it work
250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on
the SAP Smart Form
281 TCRM20
- 215
251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor
252 Where is it originated
253 What is the use of the action monitor
254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report
282 TCRM20
- 215
255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System
On which technology is it based
256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the
relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)
257 What is the use of the PP
258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing
possibilities with it
259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the
CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm
305 TCRM20
- 243
260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the
difference between them
306 TCRM20
- 244
261 What is the logic structure of the PP
262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the
use calculation )
307 TCRM20
- 245
263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing
Procedure (5)
308 TCRM20
- 246
264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it
operative
265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty
309 TCRM20
- 248
266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access
267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty
268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a
Con Is operated
269 What is a condition record
310 TCRM20
- 249
270 What is the Condition Tables
271 How does the condition Table is activated
272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table
311 TCRM20
- 250
273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251
275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure
276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of
pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other
possibilities are
277 What is the Value scale
313 TCRM20
- 255
278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20
- 256
279 What is included under the Condition Group 315
280 What is the Price Analysis
281 What is the use
282 When is it possible to use it
316 TCRM20
- 257
283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on
a BTr) has the Pricing Process
284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM
317 TCRM20
- 258
285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination
286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component
performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the
Output
287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE
318 TCRM20
- 259
288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which
indentifies has each unit (3)
289 What does the hierarchical structure allow
290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20
- 284
291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341
292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342
293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the
billing
294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)
295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing
Doc
296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate
the financial Control on the Billing Docs
297 What is the CRM Billing Application
343 TCRM20
- 285
298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under
inputs Outputs
299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into
the Billing due List
300 What other options are there by the billing docs
344
301 What are the features of the input processing 345
302 What are the 4 billing methods
303 What is a billing document spilt
304 What is a billing document merge
346 TCRM20
- 289
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc
306 What are the data sources used during the billing process
307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What
is included in each part and what are its parameters
308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding
Billing Documents
309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed
310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc
347 TCRM20
- 291
311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System
and on which cases do you use each one
312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process
348
313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the
use of each
314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool
is used for this purpose
315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting
349 TCRM20
- 292
316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan
317 Which kinds of billing plans are there
318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of
319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan
320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned
350 TCRM20
- 293
321 What is the Billing Unit
322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units
323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to
extract the information
324 To which system object is the BU assigned
351 TCRM20
- 296
325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document
326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system
Object is it defined
327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat
328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination
329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on
another document
330 What is the Billing Relevance
331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process
332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process
333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On
what is it based
352 TCRM20
- 298
334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the
ERP
335 How is it customized on the system
336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document
353 TCRM20
- 299
337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20
- 300
338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 302
339 What are the Middleware Objectives
340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his
features
341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW
connection in order to communicate with the CRM
374
375
TCRM20
- 321
342 What is the SMQ12
343 What is the TRFC
344 How the Queues are processed
345 What is the Scheduler
TCRM20
- 321
346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20
- 326
347 Where is the MW software installed
348 What is included in the CRM Server
349 What are the MW objectives (3)
TCRM20
- 327
350 Which technology runs the process 376
351 What is the Objective of the BDoc
352 What is a BDoc Type
353 What is a BDoc Instance
354 What is a BDoc message
355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc
377
378
TCRM20
- 350
356 Describe the out bounding Process
357 Describe the Inbounding Process
358 What is the use of the Queue
359 What is the administration console
360 What is the validation process
379
361 What is the Objective of the Object management
362 What is the use
363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs
380
364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and
what are the data transfer restrictions
365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and
the CRM
381
366 What is the objective of the data load
367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load
368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)
369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO
370 What is the delta Load
382
371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383
372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20
- 347
373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20
- 348
374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibility of the Administration Console
375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc
376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc
377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc
386
378 What is the Data Integrity Manager
379 What is its use
387
380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and
relation between systems (6)
388
381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc
382 What are the options for debugging
391
383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the
SAP GUI
408
384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client
385 Which configuration tools are there
409
386 What are the different Business Roles (7)
387 Where are they defined
410
388 What are the different areas on the Screen
389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective
TCRM20
- 569
390 What is personalize
391 What is Help Center
392 What is System News
393 What is Central Search
TCRM20
- 570
394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20
- 571
395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles
396 To Which System Element we assign a User
411
397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412
398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR
399 What determines what will on the NB
413
400 What is the use of the Work Center
401 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 572
402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20
- 573
403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage
404 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 574
405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20
- 575
406 What is the use of the Calendar
407 What are the configuration options
TCRM20
- 576
408 Which system could be synched with the Email application
409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding
the Emails
410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which
logical links are there (4)
414 TCRM20
- 578
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center
412 What determines the Work Center
413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the
different between them
414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports
TCRM20
- 579
415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20
- 580
416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20
- 581
417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20
- 586
418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20
- 587
419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)
420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the
assignment block (4)
TCRM20
- 588
421 What is the second view possibility on the UI
422 For what is it used
423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view
424 Who may use this view
TCRM20
- 589
425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20
- 590
426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)
427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display
428 Give examples for Hierarchies
TCRM20
- 591
429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415
430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417
431 What is the role configuration key
432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key
419
433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench
434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed
by the EEWB
435 What is the user application of the EEWB
436 What is the advantage of the EEWB
437 What is the influence on other systems
421
438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422
439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20
- 613
440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each
441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user
442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model
TCRM20
- 615
443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)
444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links
445 What are the customization options of the NB profile
TCRM20
- 617
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
5 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
101 What is the different type of service products
102 What is the Warranty product and which kind of warranty product there
are
118 TCRM10
- 492
103 What is the objective on an Attribute
104 What are the parameters that define Attribute
105 What are the Objective of Set types
106 Which options are there for Set types uses
107 What is the set type restriction
108 Which Object is assigned to another
109 What are the mini templates
119 TCRM10
- 493
110 What enables the Product Category
111 What is the Objective of Product Category
112 Describe the logic behind the structure of Hierarchies and Product
Category and set type What is the role of the set type
120 TCRM10
ndash 493
113 What are the various elements necessary to enhance a Product 121 TCRM10
ndash 493
114 What is an Adapter Object
115 What is the two required downloads when replicating data from the ERP
to the CRM
122 TCRM10
- 493
116 What are the Objectives (3) of a Transaction
117 What are the options between various transactions (3)
151 TCRM20
-1 ndash 17
118 What are the two different areas on a transaction and what is the
difference between them
119 What is the use of a BTr
120 What is the use of the BTr Type
121 What is the additional level that a sales BTr has Which check is
required to operate this level
152 TCRM20
-1 - 18
122 What is determined when a TrTy is set for a BTr What are the three
elements
123 Name a few of the Transactions Characteristics
124 What is the restriction when working with a BTr regarding follow ups
125 What is the objective of a TrTy
126 What are the Blocking Reasons Where is it defined
127 What is the use of the permission channels
153 TCRM20
ndash 19 - 51
128 What triggers the Item Category
129 What are the attributes determined by the Item Category
130 Which data and profiles are fixed on an Item Category and what
resembles these data For which type of information are they divided
131 Which data is then determined and what resembles these data
154 TCRM20
ndash 20-54
132 What is the Item Category Group Where is it defined
133 What is the sequence of the item category determination
134 What is the condition regarding the item category determination when
replicating information from the ERP to the CRM Why
155 TCRM20
- 54
135 How the system does determine the Item Category
136 What are the options for Item category determination aside from the
156 TCRM20
- 55
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
6 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
default ones
137 What are the two options to maintain Preceding and subsequent
Documents
138 What is necessary in order to carry them out
139 What is the restriction when performing a copy control for a Transaction
157 TCRM20
- 93
140 What is the objective Transaction History
141 What is the difference between different kinds of transactions
142 What does the Transaction History allow
143 What triggers the transaction History
158 TCRM20
ndash 95
144 What is the sequence of the copy control
145 In Which cases the Copy control is mandatory
146 What is the case with Service when performing copy control
159 TCRM20
- 97
147 What is linking a document subsequently
148 What is copied and what is not copied when linking a document
subsequently
149 What is updated when the subsequent link was done
150 Which profile is required in order to allow a subsequent link
160 TCRM20
- 98
151 What are the Basic Functions in a BTr and what is the objective and use
of each (profiles)
161 TCRM20
- 98
152 What are the notes Which kinds of notes the system offers
153 What are the notes features
154 To which SO can these notes be maintained
162 TCRM20
- 99
155 How looks the Hierarchy of the TDP
156 What is determined for the Text under the TDP
157 To which SO assign one the TDP
163 TCRM20
- 100
158 What is the Objective of the Date Management
159 In which cases the Date Management is usable
160 For which BTr the date management is used
161 What are the characteristics of the Date Management
162 According to which System Object the Date Management rule is
determined
164 TCRM20
- 102
163 What are Date Types
164 What are durations
165 What are the date rules
165 TCRM20
- 103
166 What is the objective of the status management and what is the use
167 What Kind of System Statuses are managed on the System
168 What are the User Status restriction regarding a BTr
169 What are the User Status options regarding a User
166 TCRM20
- 104
170 Which system Objects determine the status Profile
171 What is necessary to define and activate a status profile on the system
172 What is a status number
173 What is determined when a status profile is called Which another
system rule is then required
167 TCRM20
- 105
174 What is the Objective Incompleteness Check
175 What is the use of the Incompleteness Check
168 TCRM20
- 107
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
7 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
176 What is the hierarchy of the Incompleteness Process To which system
object is it assigned
177 What is the objective of the Change History What are the three
parameters
178 Where is the Change History defined
170 TCRM20
- 130
179 What is the Objective of the activity
180 What kinds of Activities are there in the System
181 What characterizes an Activity What is the difference from other BTr
(3)
182 What are the two leading Business Transactions Categories for activities
that are defined in the System What is the difference between them
183 What is the relation between activities and other BTr
217 TCRM20
- 131
184 What is the Business Activity Structure And what is included
185 What is the relation between the activity Category and the Transaction
Type
218
186 What is included under the default data on the activity TrTy
187 What is required in order to add product to activities
219 TCRM20
- 136
188 What are the options for Follow-up Activities on the System What is the
difference between them
220 TCRM20
- 137
189 What are the characteristics of a questionnaire 221 TCRM20
- 137
190 What is the main purpose of the Activity Journal
191 What is the use of the Journal Activity
192 What is required in order to track Products
193 What is the relation with other TrTy
222 TCRM20
- 140
194 What is the objective of the connection between the CRM System and
the groupware
195 What is the use of the groupware application
196 What is required when defining the groupware
197 What are the system requirements for operating the groupware
223 TCRM20
- 142
198 What are the Objects that could be transferred between the CRM and a
Groupware System
199 Which Technology Elements are used to execute this option What
components are required
224 TCRM20
- 144
200 What is the activity analysis
201 What is necessary in order to be able to create reports
225
202 What is the objective of the PP
203 What is the use of the PP (5)
204 What are the most important sources of information are in the PP
243 TCRM20
- 168
205 What triggers the PP
206 What is the process sequence of the PP
244 TCRM20
- 169
207 What are the four principles of the PP (for data entering for document
for process)
245 TCRM20
- 171
208 What is the Partner Function Category 246 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
209 What is the Partner Function
210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure
211 What is the Access Sequence
- 176
212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner
Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner
Function Category and the Partner Function
213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the
Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the
connection to the Access sequence
214 What is the use of the Lock
215 What is the Undefined Partner
247 TCRM20
- 178
216 What is the Objective of the PDP
217 What is the use of the PDP
218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP
219 What type of data the PDP brings
220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)
221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)
222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure
248 TCRM20
- 179
223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence
224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it
referring
225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined
249 TCRM20
- 180
226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a
process in the system
227 What are the parameters checked by the AS
228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in
order to relate a PDP to a TrTy
229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is
assigned to him
250 TCRM20
- 181
230 What is the purpose of actions on the System
231 What is the use of actions on the System
232 What is the terminology for the actions processing
273 TCRM20
- 207
233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action
234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned
235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile
236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the
execution of actions
274 TCRM20
- 208
237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System
and what is the relation between them
238 For which SO are the conditions assigned
239 What are the two mode of defining them
275 TCRM20
- 209
240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time
241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the
difference between them (3) Give examples for each
242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time
276 TCRM20
- 210
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown
244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of
each one
277 TCRM20
- 211
245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition
246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has
each
247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile
278 TCRM20
- 212
248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20
- 213
249 What is a Smart Form How does it work
250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on
the SAP Smart Form
281 TCRM20
- 215
251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor
252 Where is it originated
253 What is the use of the action monitor
254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report
282 TCRM20
- 215
255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System
On which technology is it based
256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the
relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)
257 What is the use of the PP
258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing
possibilities with it
259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the
CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm
305 TCRM20
- 243
260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the
difference between them
306 TCRM20
- 244
261 What is the logic structure of the PP
262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the
use calculation )
307 TCRM20
- 245
263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing
Procedure (5)
308 TCRM20
- 246
264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it
operative
265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty
309 TCRM20
- 248
266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access
267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty
268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a
Con Is operated
269 What is a condition record
310 TCRM20
- 249
270 What is the Condition Tables
271 How does the condition Table is activated
272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table
311 TCRM20
- 250
273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251
275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure
276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of
pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other
possibilities are
277 What is the Value scale
313 TCRM20
- 255
278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20
- 256
279 What is included under the Condition Group 315
280 What is the Price Analysis
281 What is the use
282 When is it possible to use it
316 TCRM20
- 257
283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on
a BTr) has the Pricing Process
284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM
317 TCRM20
- 258
285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination
286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component
performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the
Output
287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE
318 TCRM20
- 259
288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which
indentifies has each unit (3)
289 What does the hierarchical structure allow
290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20
- 284
291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341
292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342
293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the
billing
294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)
295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing
Doc
296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate
the financial Control on the Billing Docs
297 What is the CRM Billing Application
343 TCRM20
- 285
298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under
inputs Outputs
299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into
the Billing due List
300 What other options are there by the billing docs
344
301 What are the features of the input processing 345
302 What are the 4 billing methods
303 What is a billing document spilt
304 What is a billing document merge
346 TCRM20
- 289
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc
306 What are the data sources used during the billing process
307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What
is included in each part and what are its parameters
308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding
Billing Documents
309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed
310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc
347 TCRM20
- 291
311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System
and on which cases do you use each one
312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process
348
313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the
use of each
314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool
is used for this purpose
315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting
349 TCRM20
- 292
316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan
317 Which kinds of billing plans are there
318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of
319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan
320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned
350 TCRM20
- 293
321 What is the Billing Unit
322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units
323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to
extract the information
324 To which system object is the BU assigned
351 TCRM20
- 296
325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document
326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system
Object is it defined
327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat
328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination
329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on
another document
330 What is the Billing Relevance
331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process
332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process
333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On
what is it based
352 TCRM20
- 298
334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the
ERP
335 How is it customized on the system
336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document
353 TCRM20
- 299
337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20
- 300
338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 302
339 What are the Middleware Objectives
340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his
features
341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW
connection in order to communicate with the CRM
374
375
TCRM20
- 321
342 What is the SMQ12
343 What is the TRFC
344 How the Queues are processed
345 What is the Scheduler
TCRM20
- 321
346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20
- 326
347 Where is the MW software installed
348 What is included in the CRM Server
349 What are the MW objectives (3)
TCRM20
- 327
350 Which technology runs the process 376
351 What is the Objective of the BDoc
352 What is a BDoc Type
353 What is a BDoc Instance
354 What is a BDoc message
355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc
377
378
TCRM20
- 350
356 Describe the out bounding Process
357 Describe the Inbounding Process
358 What is the use of the Queue
359 What is the administration console
360 What is the validation process
379
361 What is the Objective of the Object management
362 What is the use
363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs
380
364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and
what are the data transfer restrictions
365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and
the CRM
381
366 What is the objective of the data load
367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load
368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)
369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO
370 What is the delta Load
382
371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383
372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20
- 347
373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20
- 348
374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibility of the Administration Console
375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc
376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc
377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc
386
378 What is the Data Integrity Manager
379 What is its use
387
380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and
relation between systems (6)
388
381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc
382 What are the options for debugging
391
383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the
SAP GUI
408
384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client
385 Which configuration tools are there
409
386 What are the different Business Roles (7)
387 Where are they defined
410
388 What are the different areas on the Screen
389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective
TCRM20
- 569
390 What is personalize
391 What is Help Center
392 What is System News
393 What is Central Search
TCRM20
- 570
394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20
- 571
395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles
396 To Which System Element we assign a User
411
397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412
398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR
399 What determines what will on the NB
413
400 What is the use of the Work Center
401 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 572
402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20
- 573
403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage
404 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 574
405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20
- 575
406 What is the use of the Calendar
407 What are the configuration options
TCRM20
- 576
408 Which system could be synched with the Email application
409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding
the Emails
410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which
logical links are there (4)
414 TCRM20
- 578
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center
412 What determines the Work Center
413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the
different between them
414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports
TCRM20
- 579
415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20
- 580
416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20
- 581
417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20
- 586
418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20
- 587
419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)
420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the
assignment block (4)
TCRM20
- 588
421 What is the second view possibility on the UI
422 For what is it used
423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view
424 Who may use this view
TCRM20
- 589
425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20
- 590
426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)
427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display
428 Give examples for Hierarchies
TCRM20
- 591
429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415
430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417
431 What is the role configuration key
432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key
419
433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench
434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed
by the EEWB
435 What is the user application of the EEWB
436 What is the advantage of the EEWB
437 What is the influence on other systems
421
438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422
439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20
- 613
440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each
441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user
442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model
TCRM20
- 615
443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)
444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links
445 What are the customization options of the NB profile
TCRM20
- 617
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
6 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
default ones
137 What are the two options to maintain Preceding and subsequent
Documents
138 What is necessary in order to carry them out
139 What is the restriction when performing a copy control for a Transaction
157 TCRM20
- 93
140 What is the objective Transaction History
141 What is the difference between different kinds of transactions
142 What does the Transaction History allow
143 What triggers the transaction History
158 TCRM20
ndash 95
144 What is the sequence of the copy control
145 In Which cases the Copy control is mandatory
146 What is the case with Service when performing copy control
159 TCRM20
- 97
147 What is linking a document subsequently
148 What is copied and what is not copied when linking a document
subsequently
149 What is updated when the subsequent link was done
150 Which profile is required in order to allow a subsequent link
160 TCRM20
- 98
151 What are the Basic Functions in a BTr and what is the objective and use
of each (profiles)
161 TCRM20
- 98
152 What are the notes Which kinds of notes the system offers
153 What are the notes features
154 To which SO can these notes be maintained
162 TCRM20
- 99
155 How looks the Hierarchy of the TDP
156 What is determined for the Text under the TDP
157 To which SO assign one the TDP
163 TCRM20
- 100
158 What is the Objective of the Date Management
159 In which cases the Date Management is usable
160 For which BTr the date management is used
161 What are the characteristics of the Date Management
162 According to which System Object the Date Management rule is
determined
164 TCRM20
- 102
163 What are Date Types
164 What are durations
165 What are the date rules
165 TCRM20
- 103
166 What is the objective of the status management and what is the use
167 What Kind of System Statuses are managed on the System
168 What are the User Status restriction regarding a BTr
169 What are the User Status options regarding a User
166 TCRM20
- 104
170 Which system Objects determine the status Profile
171 What is necessary to define and activate a status profile on the system
172 What is a status number
173 What is determined when a status profile is called Which another
system rule is then required
167 TCRM20
- 105
174 What is the Objective Incompleteness Check
175 What is the use of the Incompleteness Check
168 TCRM20
- 107
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
7 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
176 What is the hierarchy of the Incompleteness Process To which system
object is it assigned
177 What is the objective of the Change History What are the three
parameters
178 Where is the Change History defined
170 TCRM20
- 130
179 What is the Objective of the activity
180 What kinds of Activities are there in the System
181 What characterizes an Activity What is the difference from other BTr
(3)
182 What are the two leading Business Transactions Categories for activities
that are defined in the System What is the difference between them
183 What is the relation between activities and other BTr
217 TCRM20
- 131
184 What is the Business Activity Structure And what is included
185 What is the relation between the activity Category and the Transaction
Type
218
186 What is included under the default data on the activity TrTy
187 What is required in order to add product to activities
219 TCRM20
- 136
188 What are the options for Follow-up Activities on the System What is the
difference between them
220 TCRM20
- 137
189 What are the characteristics of a questionnaire 221 TCRM20
- 137
190 What is the main purpose of the Activity Journal
191 What is the use of the Journal Activity
192 What is required in order to track Products
193 What is the relation with other TrTy
222 TCRM20
- 140
194 What is the objective of the connection between the CRM System and
the groupware
195 What is the use of the groupware application
196 What is required when defining the groupware
197 What are the system requirements for operating the groupware
223 TCRM20
- 142
198 What are the Objects that could be transferred between the CRM and a
Groupware System
199 Which Technology Elements are used to execute this option What
components are required
224 TCRM20
- 144
200 What is the activity analysis
201 What is necessary in order to be able to create reports
225
202 What is the objective of the PP
203 What is the use of the PP (5)
204 What are the most important sources of information are in the PP
243 TCRM20
- 168
205 What triggers the PP
206 What is the process sequence of the PP
244 TCRM20
- 169
207 What are the four principles of the PP (for data entering for document
for process)
245 TCRM20
- 171
208 What is the Partner Function Category 246 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
209 What is the Partner Function
210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure
211 What is the Access Sequence
- 176
212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner
Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner
Function Category and the Partner Function
213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the
Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the
connection to the Access sequence
214 What is the use of the Lock
215 What is the Undefined Partner
247 TCRM20
- 178
216 What is the Objective of the PDP
217 What is the use of the PDP
218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP
219 What type of data the PDP brings
220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)
221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)
222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure
248 TCRM20
- 179
223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence
224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it
referring
225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined
249 TCRM20
- 180
226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a
process in the system
227 What are the parameters checked by the AS
228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in
order to relate a PDP to a TrTy
229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is
assigned to him
250 TCRM20
- 181
230 What is the purpose of actions on the System
231 What is the use of actions on the System
232 What is the terminology for the actions processing
273 TCRM20
- 207
233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action
234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned
235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile
236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the
execution of actions
274 TCRM20
- 208
237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System
and what is the relation between them
238 For which SO are the conditions assigned
239 What are the two mode of defining them
275 TCRM20
- 209
240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time
241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the
difference between them (3) Give examples for each
242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time
276 TCRM20
- 210
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown
244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of
each one
277 TCRM20
- 211
245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition
246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has
each
247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile
278 TCRM20
- 212
248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20
- 213
249 What is a Smart Form How does it work
250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on
the SAP Smart Form
281 TCRM20
- 215
251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor
252 Where is it originated
253 What is the use of the action monitor
254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report
282 TCRM20
- 215
255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System
On which technology is it based
256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the
relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)
257 What is the use of the PP
258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing
possibilities with it
259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the
CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm
305 TCRM20
- 243
260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the
difference between them
306 TCRM20
- 244
261 What is the logic structure of the PP
262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the
use calculation )
307 TCRM20
- 245
263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing
Procedure (5)
308 TCRM20
- 246
264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it
operative
265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty
309 TCRM20
- 248
266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access
267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty
268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a
Con Is operated
269 What is a condition record
310 TCRM20
- 249
270 What is the Condition Tables
271 How does the condition Table is activated
272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table
311 TCRM20
- 250
273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251
275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure
276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of
pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other
possibilities are
277 What is the Value scale
313 TCRM20
- 255
278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20
- 256
279 What is included under the Condition Group 315
280 What is the Price Analysis
281 What is the use
282 When is it possible to use it
316 TCRM20
- 257
283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on
a BTr) has the Pricing Process
284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM
317 TCRM20
- 258
285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination
286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component
performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the
Output
287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE
318 TCRM20
- 259
288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which
indentifies has each unit (3)
289 What does the hierarchical structure allow
290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20
- 284
291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341
292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342
293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the
billing
294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)
295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing
Doc
296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate
the financial Control on the Billing Docs
297 What is the CRM Billing Application
343 TCRM20
- 285
298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under
inputs Outputs
299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into
the Billing due List
300 What other options are there by the billing docs
344
301 What are the features of the input processing 345
302 What are the 4 billing methods
303 What is a billing document spilt
304 What is a billing document merge
346 TCRM20
- 289
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc
306 What are the data sources used during the billing process
307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What
is included in each part and what are its parameters
308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding
Billing Documents
309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed
310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc
347 TCRM20
- 291
311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System
and on which cases do you use each one
312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process
348
313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the
use of each
314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool
is used for this purpose
315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting
349 TCRM20
- 292
316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan
317 Which kinds of billing plans are there
318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of
319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan
320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned
350 TCRM20
- 293
321 What is the Billing Unit
322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units
323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to
extract the information
324 To which system object is the BU assigned
351 TCRM20
- 296
325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document
326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system
Object is it defined
327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat
328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination
329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on
another document
330 What is the Billing Relevance
331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process
332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process
333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On
what is it based
352 TCRM20
- 298
334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the
ERP
335 How is it customized on the system
336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document
353 TCRM20
- 299
337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20
- 300
338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 302
339 What are the Middleware Objectives
340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his
features
341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW
connection in order to communicate with the CRM
374
375
TCRM20
- 321
342 What is the SMQ12
343 What is the TRFC
344 How the Queues are processed
345 What is the Scheduler
TCRM20
- 321
346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20
- 326
347 Where is the MW software installed
348 What is included in the CRM Server
349 What are the MW objectives (3)
TCRM20
- 327
350 Which technology runs the process 376
351 What is the Objective of the BDoc
352 What is a BDoc Type
353 What is a BDoc Instance
354 What is a BDoc message
355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc
377
378
TCRM20
- 350
356 Describe the out bounding Process
357 Describe the Inbounding Process
358 What is the use of the Queue
359 What is the administration console
360 What is the validation process
379
361 What is the Objective of the Object management
362 What is the use
363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs
380
364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and
what are the data transfer restrictions
365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and
the CRM
381
366 What is the objective of the data load
367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load
368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)
369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO
370 What is the delta Load
382
371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383
372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20
- 347
373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20
- 348
374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibility of the Administration Console
375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc
376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc
377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc
386
378 What is the Data Integrity Manager
379 What is its use
387
380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and
relation between systems (6)
388
381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc
382 What are the options for debugging
391
383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the
SAP GUI
408
384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client
385 Which configuration tools are there
409
386 What are the different Business Roles (7)
387 Where are they defined
410
388 What are the different areas on the Screen
389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective
TCRM20
- 569
390 What is personalize
391 What is Help Center
392 What is System News
393 What is Central Search
TCRM20
- 570
394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20
- 571
395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles
396 To Which System Element we assign a User
411
397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412
398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR
399 What determines what will on the NB
413
400 What is the use of the Work Center
401 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 572
402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20
- 573
403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage
404 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 574
405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20
- 575
406 What is the use of the Calendar
407 What are the configuration options
TCRM20
- 576
408 Which system could be synched with the Email application
409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding
the Emails
410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which
logical links are there (4)
414 TCRM20
- 578
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center
412 What determines the Work Center
413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the
different between them
414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports
TCRM20
- 579
415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20
- 580
416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20
- 581
417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20
- 586
418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20
- 587
419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)
420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the
assignment block (4)
TCRM20
- 588
421 What is the second view possibility on the UI
422 For what is it used
423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view
424 Who may use this view
TCRM20
- 589
425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20
- 590
426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)
427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display
428 Give examples for Hierarchies
TCRM20
- 591
429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415
430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417
431 What is the role configuration key
432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key
419
433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench
434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed
by the EEWB
435 What is the user application of the EEWB
436 What is the advantage of the EEWB
437 What is the influence on other systems
421
438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422
439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20
- 613
440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each
441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user
442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model
TCRM20
- 615
443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)
444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links
445 What are the customization options of the NB profile
TCRM20
- 617
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
7 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
176 What is the hierarchy of the Incompleteness Process To which system
object is it assigned
177 What is the objective of the Change History What are the three
parameters
178 Where is the Change History defined
170 TCRM20
- 130
179 What is the Objective of the activity
180 What kinds of Activities are there in the System
181 What characterizes an Activity What is the difference from other BTr
(3)
182 What are the two leading Business Transactions Categories for activities
that are defined in the System What is the difference between them
183 What is the relation between activities and other BTr
217 TCRM20
- 131
184 What is the Business Activity Structure And what is included
185 What is the relation between the activity Category and the Transaction
Type
218
186 What is included under the default data on the activity TrTy
187 What is required in order to add product to activities
219 TCRM20
- 136
188 What are the options for Follow-up Activities on the System What is the
difference between them
220 TCRM20
- 137
189 What are the characteristics of a questionnaire 221 TCRM20
- 137
190 What is the main purpose of the Activity Journal
191 What is the use of the Journal Activity
192 What is required in order to track Products
193 What is the relation with other TrTy
222 TCRM20
- 140
194 What is the objective of the connection between the CRM System and
the groupware
195 What is the use of the groupware application
196 What is required when defining the groupware
197 What are the system requirements for operating the groupware
223 TCRM20
- 142
198 What are the Objects that could be transferred between the CRM and a
Groupware System
199 Which Technology Elements are used to execute this option What
components are required
224 TCRM20
- 144
200 What is the activity analysis
201 What is necessary in order to be able to create reports
225
202 What is the objective of the PP
203 What is the use of the PP (5)
204 What are the most important sources of information are in the PP
243 TCRM20
- 168
205 What triggers the PP
206 What is the process sequence of the PP
244 TCRM20
- 169
207 What are the four principles of the PP (for data entering for document
for process)
245 TCRM20
- 171
208 What is the Partner Function Category 246 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
209 What is the Partner Function
210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure
211 What is the Access Sequence
- 176
212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner
Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner
Function Category and the Partner Function
213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the
Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the
connection to the Access sequence
214 What is the use of the Lock
215 What is the Undefined Partner
247 TCRM20
- 178
216 What is the Objective of the PDP
217 What is the use of the PDP
218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP
219 What type of data the PDP brings
220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)
221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)
222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure
248 TCRM20
- 179
223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence
224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it
referring
225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined
249 TCRM20
- 180
226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a
process in the system
227 What are the parameters checked by the AS
228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in
order to relate a PDP to a TrTy
229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is
assigned to him
250 TCRM20
- 181
230 What is the purpose of actions on the System
231 What is the use of actions on the System
232 What is the terminology for the actions processing
273 TCRM20
- 207
233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action
234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned
235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile
236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the
execution of actions
274 TCRM20
- 208
237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System
and what is the relation between them
238 For which SO are the conditions assigned
239 What are the two mode of defining them
275 TCRM20
- 209
240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time
241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the
difference between them (3) Give examples for each
242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time
276 TCRM20
- 210
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown
244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of
each one
277 TCRM20
- 211
245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition
246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has
each
247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile
278 TCRM20
- 212
248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20
- 213
249 What is a Smart Form How does it work
250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on
the SAP Smart Form
281 TCRM20
- 215
251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor
252 Where is it originated
253 What is the use of the action monitor
254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report
282 TCRM20
- 215
255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System
On which technology is it based
256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the
relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)
257 What is the use of the PP
258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing
possibilities with it
259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the
CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm
305 TCRM20
- 243
260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the
difference between them
306 TCRM20
- 244
261 What is the logic structure of the PP
262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the
use calculation )
307 TCRM20
- 245
263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing
Procedure (5)
308 TCRM20
- 246
264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it
operative
265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty
309 TCRM20
- 248
266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access
267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty
268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a
Con Is operated
269 What is a condition record
310 TCRM20
- 249
270 What is the Condition Tables
271 How does the condition Table is activated
272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table
311 TCRM20
- 250
273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251
275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure
276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of
pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other
possibilities are
277 What is the Value scale
313 TCRM20
- 255
278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20
- 256
279 What is included under the Condition Group 315
280 What is the Price Analysis
281 What is the use
282 When is it possible to use it
316 TCRM20
- 257
283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on
a BTr) has the Pricing Process
284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM
317 TCRM20
- 258
285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination
286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component
performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the
Output
287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE
318 TCRM20
- 259
288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which
indentifies has each unit (3)
289 What does the hierarchical structure allow
290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20
- 284
291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341
292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342
293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the
billing
294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)
295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing
Doc
296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate
the financial Control on the Billing Docs
297 What is the CRM Billing Application
343 TCRM20
- 285
298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under
inputs Outputs
299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into
the Billing due List
300 What other options are there by the billing docs
344
301 What are the features of the input processing 345
302 What are the 4 billing methods
303 What is a billing document spilt
304 What is a billing document merge
346 TCRM20
- 289
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc
306 What are the data sources used during the billing process
307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What
is included in each part and what are its parameters
308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding
Billing Documents
309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed
310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc
347 TCRM20
- 291
311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System
and on which cases do you use each one
312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process
348
313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the
use of each
314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool
is used for this purpose
315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting
349 TCRM20
- 292
316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan
317 Which kinds of billing plans are there
318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of
319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan
320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned
350 TCRM20
- 293
321 What is the Billing Unit
322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units
323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to
extract the information
324 To which system object is the BU assigned
351 TCRM20
- 296
325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document
326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system
Object is it defined
327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat
328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination
329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on
another document
330 What is the Billing Relevance
331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process
332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process
333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On
what is it based
352 TCRM20
- 298
334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the
ERP
335 How is it customized on the system
336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document
353 TCRM20
- 299
337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20
- 300
338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 302
339 What are the Middleware Objectives
340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his
features
341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW
connection in order to communicate with the CRM
374
375
TCRM20
- 321
342 What is the SMQ12
343 What is the TRFC
344 How the Queues are processed
345 What is the Scheduler
TCRM20
- 321
346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20
- 326
347 Where is the MW software installed
348 What is included in the CRM Server
349 What are the MW objectives (3)
TCRM20
- 327
350 Which technology runs the process 376
351 What is the Objective of the BDoc
352 What is a BDoc Type
353 What is a BDoc Instance
354 What is a BDoc message
355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc
377
378
TCRM20
- 350
356 Describe the out bounding Process
357 Describe the Inbounding Process
358 What is the use of the Queue
359 What is the administration console
360 What is the validation process
379
361 What is the Objective of the Object management
362 What is the use
363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs
380
364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and
what are the data transfer restrictions
365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and
the CRM
381
366 What is the objective of the data load
367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load
368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)
369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO
370 What is the delta Load
382
371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383
372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20
- 347
373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20
- 348
374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibility of the Administration Console
375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc
376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc
377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc
386
378 What is the Data Integrity Manager
379 What is its use
387
380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and
relation between systems (6)
388
381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc
382 What are the options for debugging
391
383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the
SAP GUI
408
384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client
385 Which configuration tools are there
409
386 What are the different Business Roles (7)
387 Where are they defined
410
388 What are the different areas on the Screen
389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective
TCRM20
- 569
390 What is personalize
391 What is Help Center
392 What is System News
393 What is Central Search
TCRM20
- 570
394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20
- 571
395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles
396 To Which System Element we assign a User
411
397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412
398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR
399 What determines what will on the NB
413
400 What is the use of the Work Center
401 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 572
402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20
- 573
403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage
404 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 574
405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20
- 575
406 What is the use of the Calendar
407 What are the configuration options
TCRM20
- 576
408 Which system could be synched with the Email application
409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding
the Emails
410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which
logical links are there (4)
414 TCRM20
- 578
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center
412 What determines the Work Center
413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the
different between them
414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports
TCRM20
- 579
415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20
- 580
416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20
- 581
417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20
- 586
418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20
- 587
419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)
420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the
assignment block (4)
TCRM20
- 588
421 What is the second view possibility on the UI
422 For what is it used
423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view
424 Who may use this view
TCRM20
- 589
425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20
- 590
426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)
427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display
428 Give examples for Hierarchies
TCRM20
- 591
429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415
430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417
431 What is the role configuration key
432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key
419
433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench
434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed
by the EEWB
435 What is the user application of the EEWB
436 What is the advantage of the EEWB
437 What is the influence on other systems
421
438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422
439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20
- 613
440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each
441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user
442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model
TCRM20
- 615
443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)
444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links
445 What are the customization options of the NB profile
TCRM20
- 617
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
8 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
209 What is the Partner Function
210 What is the Partner Determination Procedure
211 What is the Access Sequence
- 176
212 What is the customizing restriction regarding the assignment of a Partner
Function What are the Hierarchy and Relation between the Partner
Function Category and the Partner Function
213 What is the Relationship Category What is the Relation between the
Partner Function Category and the Relationship Category What is the
connection to the Access sequence
214 What is the use of the Lock
215 What is the Undefined Partner
247 TCRM20
- 178
216 What is the Objective of the PDP
217 What is the use of the PDP
218 Which main data sources are used by the PDP
219 What type of data the PDP brings
220 Which data is determined in the PDP (4)
221 Which PDP parameters are defined (2)
222 To what we assign the Partner Determination Procedure
248 TCRM20
- 179
223 What is the Objective of the Access Sequence
224 What is the Use of the Access Sequence For which objects is it
referring
225 What is the option when no Access Sequence is determined
249 TCRM20
- 180
226 What is the order of events of data determination when processing a
process in the system
227 What are the parameters checked by the AS
228 Which customizing condition regarding the system process is required in
order to relate a PDP to a TrTy
229 What happens when a BP is determined on the PDP but no AS is
assigned to him
250 TCRM20
- 181
230 What is the purpose of actions on the System
231 What is the use of actions on the System
232 What is the terminology for the actions processing
273 TCRM20
- 207
233 What is the sequence of events for executing an action
234 To which System Element the Action Profile is assigned
235 What is the purpose of an Action Profile
236 Which Parameters are determined in the Action Profile regarding the
execution of actions
274 TCRM20
- 208
237 What is the Start Condition and the Schedule Condition on the System
and what is the relation between them
238 For which SO are the conditions assigned
239 What are the two mode of defining them
275 TCRM20
- 209
240 What is the purpose of the Processing Time
241 What kind of Processing Time the System allows and what is the
difference between them (3) Give examples for each
242 To which System Object do we assign the Processing Time
276 TCRM20
- 210
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown
244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of
each one
277 TCRM20
- 211
245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition
246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has
each
247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile
278 TCRM20
- 212
248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20
- 213
249 What is a Smart Form How does it work
250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on
the SAP Smart Form
281 TCRM20
- 215
251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor
252 Where is it originated
253 What is the use of the action monitor
254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report
282 TCRM20
- 215
255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System
On which technology is it based
256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the
relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)
257 What is the use of the PP
258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing
possibilities with it
259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the
CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm
305 TCRM20
- 243
260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the
difference between them
306 TCRM20
- 244
261 What is the logic structure of the PP
262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the
use calculation )
307 TCRM20
- 245
263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing
Procedure (5)
308 TCRM20
- 246
264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it
operative
265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty
309 TCRM20
- 248
266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access
267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty
268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a
Con Is operated
269 What is a condition record
310 TCRM20
- 249
270 What is the Condition Tables
271 How does the condition Table is activated
272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table
311 TCRM20
- 250
273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251
275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure
276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of
pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other
possibilities are
277 What is the Value scale
313 TCRM20
- 255
278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20
- 256
279 What is included under the Condition Group 315
280 What is the Price Analysis
281 What is the use
282 When is it possible to use it
316 TCRM20
- 257
283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on
a BTr) has the Pricing Process
284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM
317 TCRM20
- 258
285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination
286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component
performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the
Output
287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE
318 TCRM20
- 259
288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which
indentifies has each unit (3)
289 What does the hierarchical structure allow
290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20
- 284
291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341
292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342
293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the
billing
294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)
295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing
Doc
296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate
the financial Control on the Billing Docs
297 What is the CRM Billing Application
343 TCRM20
- 285
298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under
inputs Outputs
299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into
the Billing due List
300 What other options are there by the billing docs
344
301 What are the features of the input processing 345
302 What are the 4 billing methods
303 What is a billing document spilt
304 What is a billing document merge
346 TCRM20
- 289
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc
306 What are the data sources used during the billing process
307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What
is included in each part and what are its parameters
308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding
Billing Documents
309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed
310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc
347 TCRM20
- 291
311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System
and on which cases do you use each one
312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process
348
313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the
use of each
314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool
is used for this purpose
315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting
349 TCRM20
- 292
316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan
317 Which kinds of billing plans are there
318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of
319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan
320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned
350 TCRM20
- 293
321 What is the Billing Unit
322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units
323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to
extract the information
324 To which system object is the BU assigned
351 TCRM20
- 296
325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document
326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system
Object is it defined
327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat
328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination
329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on
another document
330 What is the Billing Relevance
331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process
332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process
333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On
what is it based
352 TCRM20
- 298
334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the
ERP
335 How is it customized on the system
336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document
353 TCRM20
- 299
337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20
- 300
338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 302
339 What are the Middleware Objectives
340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his
features
341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW
connection in order to communicate with the CRM
374
375
TCRM20
- 321
342 What is the SMQ12
343 What is the TRFC
344 How the Queues are processed
345 What is the Scheduler
TCRM20
- 321
346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20
- 326
347 Where is the MW software installed
348 What is included in the CRM Server
349 What are the MW objectives (3)
TCRM20
- 327
350 Which technology runs the process 376
351 What is the Objective of the BDoc
352 What is a BDoc Type
353 What is a BDoc Instance
354 What is a BDoc message
355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc
377
378
TCRM20
- 350
356 Describe the out bounding Process
357 Describe the Inbounding Process
358 What is the use of the Queue
359 What is the administration console
360 What is the validation process
379
361 What is the Objective of the Object management
362 What is the use
363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs
380
364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and
what are the data transfer restrictions
365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and
the CRM
381
366 What is the objective of the data load
367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load
368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)
369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO
370 What is the delta Load
382
371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383
372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20
- 347
373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20
- 348
374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibility of the Administration Console
375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc
376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc
377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc
386
378 What is the Data Integrity Manager
379 What is its use
387
380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and
relation between systems (6)
388
381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc
382 What are the options for debugging
391
383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the
SAP GUI
408
384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client
385 Which configuration tools are there
409
386 What are the different Business Roles (7)
387 Where are they defined
410
388 What are the different areas on the Screen
389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective
TCRM20
- 569
390 What is personalize
391 What is Help Center
392 What is System News
393 What is Central Search
TCRM20
- 570
394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20
- 571
395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles
396 To Which System Element we assign a User
411
397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412
398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR
399 What determines what will on the NB
413
400 What is the use of the Work Center
401 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 572
402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20
- 573
403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage
404 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 574
405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20
- 575
406 What is the use of the Calendar
407 What are the configuration options
TCRM20
- 576
408 Which system could be synched with the Email application
409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding
the Emails
410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which
logical links are there (4)
414 TCRM20
- 578
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center
412 What determines the Work Center
413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the
different between them
414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports
TCRM20
- 579
415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20
- 580
416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20
- 581
417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20
- 586
418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20
- 587
419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)
420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the
assignment block (4)
TCRM20
- 588
421 What is the second view possibility on the UI
422 For what is it used
423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view
424 Who may use this view
TCRM20
- 589
425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20
- 590
426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)
427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display
428 Give examples for Hierarchies
TCRM20
- 591
429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415
430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417
431 What is the role configuration key
432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key
419
433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench
434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed
by the EEWB
435 What is the user application of the EEWB
436 What is the advantage of the EEWB
437 What is the influence on other systems
421
438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422
439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20
- 613
440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each
441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user
442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model
TCRM20
- 615
443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)
444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links
445 What are the customization options of the NB profile
TCRM20
- 617
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
9 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
243 Where can we view the assigned actions What parameters are shown
244 What are the Processing types in the System and what is the purpose of
each one
277 TCRM20
- 211
245 What is the Hierarchy of the Action Profile definition
246 What are the parameters of the action profile and which characters has
each
247 What is the relation between a Transaction type and the Action Profile
278 TCRM20
- 212
248 What is the sequence of event when for an action profile to go in active 279 TCRM20
- 213
249 What is a Smart Form How does it work
250 Which kind of examples of activities documentation could be designed on
the SAP Smart Form
281 TCRM20
- 215
251 What is the purpose of the Action Monitor
252 Where is it originated
253 What is the use of the action monitor
254 What is the relation between the action monitor and the selection report
282 TCRM20
- 215
255 What is the responsible component for the Pricing in the CRM System
On which technology is it based
256 Which Pricing elements are included in the IPC From where comes the
relevant data (4 ndash sales product tax)
257 What is the use of the PP
258 On which SAP applications can the IPC be used What are the pricing
possibilities with it
259 What are the limitations of transferring pricing data from the ERP to the
CRM And why httphelpsapcomerp2005_ehp_04helpdataEN352cd77bd7705394e10000009b387c12framesethtm
305 TCRM20
- 243
260 What are the two Implementation Scenarios for the IPC and what is the
difference between them
306 TCRM20
- 244
261 What is the logic structure of the PP
262 On which parameters does the PP influence the Condition types (5 ndash the
use calculation )
307 TCRM20
- 245
263 Which System Objects and Data sources determine the Pricing
Procedure (5)
308 TCRM20
- 246
264 What is the Objective of the Con Ty On which system Object is it
operative
265 What are the characteristics of the Cond Ty
309 TCRM20
- 248
266 What is the objective of the Sequence Access
267 What is the Hierarchy between the AS and the Con Ty
268 Where is it used on the System What is the sequence of events when a
Con Is operated
269 What is a condition record
310 TCRM20
- 249
270 What is the Condition Tables
271 How does the condition Table is activated
272 What is the main restriction regarding the condition table
311 TCRM20
- 250
273 What is the Sequence of events during the Pricing Procedure 312 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251
275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure
276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of
pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other
possibilities are
277 What is the Value scale
313 TCRM20
- 255
278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20
- 256
279 What is included under the Condition Group 315
280 What is the Price Analysis
281 What is the use
282 When is it possible to use it
316 TCRM20
- 257
283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on
a BTr) has the Pricing Process
284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM
317 TCRM20
- 258
285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination
286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component
performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the
Output
287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE
318 TCRM20
- 259
288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which
indentifies has each unit (3)
289 What does the hierarchical structure allow
290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20
- 284
291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341
292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342
293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the
billing
294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)
295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing
Doc
296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate
the financial Control on the Billing Docs
297 What is the CRM Billing Application
343 TCRM20
- 285
298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under
inputs Outputs
299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into
the Billing due List
300 What other options are there by the billing docs
344
301 What are the features of the input processing 345
302 What are the 4 billing methods
303 What is a billing document spilt
304 What is a billing document merge
346 TCRM20
- 289
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc
306 What are the data sources used during the billing process
307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What
is included in each part and what are its parameters
308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding
Billing Documents
309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed
310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc
347 TCRM20
- 291
311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System
and on which cases do you use each one
312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process
348
313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the
use of each
314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool
is used for this purpose
315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting
349 TCRM20
- 292
316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan
317 Which kinds of billing plans are there
318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of
319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan
320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned
350 TCRM20
- 293
321 What is the Billing Unit
322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units
323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to
extract the information
324 To which system object is the BU assigned
351 TCRM20
- 296
325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document
326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system
Object is it defined
327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat
328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination
329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on
another document
330 What is the Billing Relevance
331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process
332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process
333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On
what is it based
352 TCRM20
- 298
334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the
ERP
335 How is it customized on the system
336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document
353 TCRM20
- 299
337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20
- 300
338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 302
339 What are the Middleware Objectives
340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his
features
341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW
connection in order to communicate with the CRM
374
375
TCRM20
- 321
342 What is the SMQ12
343 What is the TRFC
344 How the Queues are processed
345 What is the Scheduler
TCRM20
- 321
346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20
- 326
347 Where is the MW software installed
348 What is included in the CRM Server
349 What are the MW objectives (3)
TCRM20
- 327
350 Which technology runs the process 376
351 What is the Objective of the BDoc
352 What is a BDoc Type
353 What is a BDoc Instance
354 What is a BDoc message
355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc
377
378
TCRM20
- 350
356 Describe the out bounding Process
357 Describe the Inbounding Process
358 What is the use of the Queue
359 What is the administration console
360 What is the validation process
379
361 What is the Objective of the Object management
362 What is the use
363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs
380
364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and
what are the data transfer restrictions
365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and
the CRM
381
366 What is the objective of the data load
367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load
368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)
369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO
370 What is the delta Load
382
371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383
372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20
- 347
373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20
- 348
374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibility of the Administration Console
375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc
376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc
377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc
386
378 What is the Data Integrity Manager
379 What is its use
387
380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and
relation between systems (6)
388
381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc
382 What are the options for debugging
391
383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the
SAP GUI
408
384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client
385 Which configuration tools are there
409
386 What are the different Business Roles (7)
387 Where are they defined
410
388 What are the different areas on the Screen
389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective
TCRM20
- 569
390 What is personalize
391 What is Help Center
392 What is System News
393 What is Central Search
TCRM20
- 570
394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20
- 571
395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles
396 To Which System Element we assign a User
411
397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412
398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR
399 What determines what will on the NB
413
400 What is the use of the Work Center
401 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 572
402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20
- 573
403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage
404 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 574
405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20
- 575
406 What is the use of the Calendar
407 What are the configuration options
TCRM20
- 576
408 Which system could be synched with the Email application
409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding
the Emails
410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which
logical links are there (4)
414 TCRM20
- 578
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center
412 What determines the Work Center
413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the
different between them
414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports
TCRM20
- 579
415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20
- 580
416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20
- 581
417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20
- 586
418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20
- 587
419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)
420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the
assignment block (4)
TCRM20
- 588
421 What is the second view possibility on the UI
422 For what is it used
423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view
424 Who may use this view
TCRM20
- 589
425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20
- 590
426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)
427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display
428 Give examples for Hierarchies
TCRM20
- 591
429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415
430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417
431 What is the role configuration key
432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key
419
433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench
434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed
by the EEWB
435 What is the user application of the EEWB
436 What is the advantage of the EEWB
437 What is the influence on other systems
421
438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422
439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20
- 613
440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each
441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user
442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model
TCRM20
- 615
443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)
444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links
445 What are the customization options of the NB profile
TCRM20
- 617
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
10 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
274 Which Condition techniques are already determined in the System - 251
275 What is the role of the Condition Records on the Pricing Procedure
276 What is the sequence of events of the condition record in the process of
pricing How does a Condition Record calculate the result What other
possibilities are
277 What is the Value scale
313 TCRM20
- 255
278 To which System Object could Conditions be maintained 314 TCRM20
- 256
279 What is included under the Condition Group 315
280 What is the Price Analysis
281 What is the use
282 When is it possible to use it
316 TCRM20
- 257
283 Which different function and uses (other than the regular pricing used on
a BTr) has the Pricing Process
284 What are the restrictions of pricing procedures on CRM
317 TCRM20
- 258
285 What are the different data sources for the Tax Determination
286 How is the Sequence of the tax determination Which component
performs the calculation Which other Data Bases are involved What is the
Output
287 Which CRM Pricing Procedure is recommended for using the TTE
318 TCRM20
- 259
288 What is the hierarchical structure of the FI on the ECC Which
indentifies has each unit (3)
289 What does the hierarchical structure allow
290 What are the two main business scenarios of the CRM Billing 340 TCRM20
- 284
291 What is the process flow of Service Cycle with the Billing 341
292 What is the process flow of sale Cycle with the Billing 342
293 What is the logic Process between the ECC and the CRM regarding the
billing
294 What are the BTrs that use the Billing Doc (5 - sales and service)
295 How can two different business scenarios be integrated into one Billing
Doc
296 Which FI components must be installed and where in order to integrate
the financial Control on the Billing Docs
297 What is the CRM Billing Application
343 TCRM20
- 285
298 What are the main stages on the Billing Process What is included under
inputs Outputs
299 What is the option of integrating information from external systems into
the Billing due List
300 What other options are there by the billing docs
344
301 What are the features of the input processing 345
302 What are the 4 billing methods
303 What is a billing document spilt
304 What is a billing document merge
346 TCRM20
- 289
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc
306 What are the data sources used during the billing process
307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What
is included in each part and what are its parameters
308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding
Billing Documents
309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed
310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc
347 TCRM20
- 291
311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System
and on which cases do you use each one
312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process
348
313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the
use of each
314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool
is used for this purpose
315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting
349 TCRM20
- 292
316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan
317 Which kinds of billing plans are there
318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of
319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan
320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned
350 TCRM20
- 293
321 What is the Billing Unit
322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units
323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to
extract the information
324 To which system object is the BU assigned
351 TCRM20
- 296
325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document
326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system
Object is it defined
327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat
328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination
329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on
another document
330 What is the Billing Relevance
331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process
332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process
333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On
what is it based
352 TCRM20
- 298
334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the
ERP
335 How is it customized on the system
336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document
353 TCRM20
- 299
337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20
- 300
338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 302
339 What are the Middleware Objectives
340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his
features
341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW
connection in order to communicate with the CRM
374
375
TCRM20
- 321
342 What is the SMQ12
343 What is the TRFC
344 How the Queues are processed
345 What is the Scheduler
TCRM20
- 321
346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20
- 326
347 Where is the MW software installed
348 What is included in the CRM Server
349 What are the MW objectives (3)
TCRM20
- 327
350 Which technology runs the process 376
351 What is the Objective of the BDoc
352 What is a BDoc Type
353 What is a BDoc Instance
354 What is a BDoc message
355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc
377
378
TCRM20
- 350
356 Describe the out bounding Process
357 Describe the Inbounding Process
358 What is the use of the Queue
359 What is the administration console
360 What is the validation process
379
361 What is the Objective of the Object management
362 What is the use
363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs
380
364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and
what are the data transfer restrictions
365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and
the CRM
381
366 What is the objective of the data load
367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load
368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)
369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO
370 What is the delta Load
382
371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383
372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20
- 347
373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20
- 348
374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibility of the Administration Console
375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc
376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc
377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc
386
378 What is the Data Integrity Manager
379 What is its use
387
380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and
relation between systems (6)
388
381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc
382 What are the options for debugging
391
383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the
SAP GUI
408
384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client
385 Which configuration tools are there
409
386 What are the different Business Roles (7)
387 Where are they defined
410
388 What are the different areas on the Screen
389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective
TCRM20
- 569
390 What is personalize
391 What is Help Center
392 What is System News
393 What is Central Search
TCRM20
- 570
394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20
- 571
395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles
396 To Which System Element we assign a User
411
397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412
398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR
399 What determines what will on the NB
413
400 What is the use of the Work Center
401 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 572
402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20
- 573
403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage
404 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 574
405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20
- 575
406 What is the use of the Calendar
407 What are the configuration options
TCRM20
- 576
408 Which system could be synched with the Email application
409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding
the Emails
410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which
logical links are there (4)
414 TCRM20
- 578
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center
412 What determines the Work Center
413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the
different between them
414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports
TCRM20
- 579
415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20
- 580
416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20
- 581
417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20
- 586
418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20
- 587
419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)
420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the
assignment block (4)
TCRM20
- 588
421 What is the second view possibility on the UI
422 For what is it used
423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view
424 Who may use this view
TCRM20
- 589
425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20
- 590
426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)
427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display
428 Give examples for Hierarchies
TCRM20
- 591
429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415
430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417
431 What is the role configuration key
432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key
419
433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench
434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed
by the EEWB
435 What is the user application of the EEWB
436 What is the advantage of the EEWB
437 What is the influence on other systems
421
438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422
439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20
- 613
440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each
441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user
442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model
TCRM20
- 615
443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)
444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links
445 What are the customization options of the NB profile
TCRM20
- 617
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
11 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
305 What is the logic relation between the BdL to the BDoc
306 What are the data sources used during the billing process
307 What is the Logic structure of a billing doc Of what is it consisted What
is included in each part and what are its parameters
308 What are the Relation between the CRM and ERP Systems regarding
Billing Documents
309 Until which Stage can a BDoc be changed
310 What is the cancellation policy of a BDoc
347 TCRM20
- 291
311 What are the two user technical ways to execute a Billing on the System
and on which cases do you use each one
312 What is a Variant in the Billing Process
348
313 What kind of process outputs there are to the Billing Process What it the
use of each
314 What are the different output methods for an Invoice Which system tool
is used for this purpose
315 What are other System Options for a transferring BDoc to accounting
349 TCRM20
- 292
316 What is the purpose of a Billing Plan
317 Which kinds of billing plans are there
318 Which System Objects the Billing plan is consisted of
319 Which Business Scenarios can use the Billing Plan
320 To which system objects the business plan is assigned
350 TCRM20
- 293
321 What is the Billing Unit
322 What is the logic relation between the BU and other Org units
323 From which data source is the BU derived Which document it uses to
extract the information
324 To which system object is the BU assigned
351 TCRM20
- 296
325 What properties are required to be customized in the billing document
326 What is the purpose of the Billing type Where and to which system
Object is it defined
327 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat
328 What is the purpose of determining the It Cat determination
329 What is the condition when billing a document that was sourced on
another document
330 What is the Billing Relevance
331 What is the logical relation between the BTr and the Billing process
332 What is the Order of customization of the billing process
333 What is the logic relation between the BTr to the Billing Process On
what is it based
352 TCRM20
- 298
334 What is required in order to process a BTr that was replicated to the
ERP
335 How is it customized on the system
336 Where is it possible to see the accounting document
353 TCRM20
- 299
337 How flows the process between the ERP and the CRM 355 TCRM20
- 300
338 What are the options for configuration of the billing application 357 TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 302
339 What are the Middleware Objectives
340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his
features
341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW
connection in order to communicate with the CRM
374
375
TCRM20
- 321
342 What is the SMQ12
343 What is the TRFC
344 How the Queues are processed
345 What is the Scheduler
TCRM20
- 321
346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20
- 326
347 Where is the MW software installed
348 What is included in the CRM Server
349 What are the MW objectives (3)
TCRM20
- 327
350 Which technology runs the process 376
351 What is the Objective of the BDoc
352 What is a BDoc Type
353 What is a BDoc Instance
354 What is a BDoc message
355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc
377
378
TCRM20
- 350
356 Describe the out bounding Process
357 Describe the Inbounding Process
358 What is the use of the Queue
359 What is the administration console
360 What is the validation process
379
361 What is the Objective of the Object management
362 What is the use
363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs
380
364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and
what are the data transfer restrictions
365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and
the CRM
381
366 What is the objective of the data load
367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load
368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)
369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO
370 What is the delta Load
382
371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383
372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20
- 347
373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20
- 348
374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibility of the Administration Console
375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc
376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc
377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc
386
378 What is the Data Integrity Manager
379 What is its use
387
380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and
relation between systems (6)
388
381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc
382 What are the options for debugging
391
383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the
SAP GUI
408
384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client
385 Which configuration tools are there
409
386 What are the different Business Roles (7)
387 Where are they defined
410
388 What are the different areas on the Screen
389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective
TCRM20
- 569
390 What is personalize
391 What is Help Center
392 What is System News
393 What is Central Search
TCRM20
- 570
394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20
- 571
395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles
396 To Which System Element we assign a User
411
397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412
398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR
399 What determines what will on the NB
413
400 What is the use of the Work Center
401 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 572
402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20
- 573
403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage
404 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 574
405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20
- 575
406 What is the use of the Calendar
407 What are the configuration options
TCRM20
- 576
408 Which system could be synched with the Email application
409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding
the Emails
410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which
logical links are there (4)
414 TCRM20
- 578
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center
412 What determines the Work Center
413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the
different between them
414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports
TCRM20
- 579
415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20
- 580
416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20
- 581
417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20
- 586
418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20
- 587
419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)
420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the
assignment block (4)
TCRM20
- 588
421 What is the second view possibility on the UI
422 For what is it used
423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view
424 Who may use this view
TCRM20
- 589
425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20
- 590
426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)
427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display
428 Give examples for Hierarchies
TCRM20
- 591
429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415
430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417
431 What is the role configuration key
432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key
419
433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench
434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed
by the EEWB
435 What is the user application of the EEWB
436 What is the advantage of the EEWB
437 What is the influence on other systems
421
438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422
439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20
- 613
440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each
441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user
442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model
TCRM20
- 615
443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)
444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links
445 What are the customization options of the NB profile
TCRM20
- 617
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
12 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 302
339 What are the Middleware Objectives
340 Which software component performs the data exchange and what are his
features
341 Name the Business Scenarios and systems that may use the MW
connection in order to communicate with the CRM
374
375
TCRM20
- 321
342 What is the SMQ12
343 What is the TRFC
344 How the Queues are processed
345 What is the Scheduler
TCRM20
- 321
346 What is the SAP APO What is AtP What is ECC What is BW TCRM20
- 326
347 Where is the MW software installed
348 What is included in the CRM Server
349 What are the MW objectives (3)
TCRM20
- 327
350 Which technology runs the process 376
351 What is the Objective of the BDoc
352 What is a BDoc Type
353 What is a BDoc Instance
354 What is a BDoc message
355 What is qRFC and what is the different between and the BDoc
377
378
TCRM20
- 350
356 Describe the out bounding Process
357 Describe the Inbounding Process
358 What is the use of the Queue
359 What is the administration console
360 What is the validation process
379
361 What is the Objective of the Object management
362 What is the use
363 What is data inconsistency and how is it occurs
380
364 Which kinds of data are exchanged between the ECC and the CRM and
what are the data transfer restrictions
365 What are the three classifications data replication between the ECC and
the CRM
381
366 What is the objective of the data load
367 What is the initial Load What is the customary initial load
368 What is the recommended chronological order of the initial Load (4)
369 What is the recommended chronological order of the BO
370 What is the delta Load
382
371 What is a filter What are the restrictions of a filter 383
372 What is the CRM adapter on the MW software TCRM20
- 347
373 What is the Role of an Adapter TCRM20
- 348
374 What are the main system processes and scenario under the 385
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibility of the Administration Console
375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc
376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc
377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc
386
378 What is the Data Integrity Manager
379 What is its use
387
380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and
relation between systems (6)
388
381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc
382 What are the options for debugging
391
383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the
SAP GUI
408
384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client
385 Which configuration tools are there
409
386 What are the different Business Roles (7)
387 Where are they defined
410
388 What are the different areas on the Screen
389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective
TCRM20
- 569
390 What is personalize
391 What is Help Center
392 What is System News
393 What is Central Search
TCRM20
- 570
394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20
- 571
395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles
396 To Which System Element we assign a User
411
397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412
398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR
399 What determines what will on the NB
413
400 What is the use of the Work Center
401 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 572
402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20
- 573
403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage
404 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 574
405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20
- 575
406 What is the use of the Calendar
407 What are the configuration options
TCRM20
- 576
408 Which system could be synched with the Email application
409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding
the Emails
410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which
logical links are there (4)
414 TCRM20
- 578
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center
412 What determines the Work Center
413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the
different between them
414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports
TCRM20
- 579
415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20
- 580
416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20
- 581
417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20
- 586
418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20
- 587
419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)
420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the
assignment block (4)
TCRM20
- 588
421 What is the second view possibility on the UI
422 For what is it used
423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view
424 Who may use this view
TCRM20
- 589
425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20
- 590
426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)
427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display
428 Give examples for Hierarchies
TCRM20
- 591
429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415
430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417
431 What is the role configuration key
432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key
419
433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench
434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed
by the EEWB
435 What is the user application of the EEWB
436 What is the advantage of the EEWB
437 What is the influence on other systems
421
438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422
439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20
- 613
440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each
441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user
442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model
TCRM20
- 615
443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)
444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links
445 What are the customization options of the NB profile
TCRM20
- 617
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
13 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
responsibility of the Administration Console
375 What is a replication object What is the logic relation with the BDoc
376 What is a Publication What is the logic relation with the mBDoc
377 What is a Subscription What is the logic relation with the BDoc
386
378 What is the Data Integrity Manager
379 What is its use
387
380 What is the use of the data integrity manager regarding data SO and
relation between systems (6)
388
381 What is the meaning of an Error on the on a BDoc
382 What are the options for debugging
391
383 What is the difference in the initial use between the Web Client and the
SAP GUI
408
384 What enable all the Configuration tools of the Web Client
385 Which configuration tools are there
409
386 What are the different Business Roles (7)
387 Where are they defined
410
388 What are the different areas on the Screen
389 What is the L Shape and what is its objective
TCRM20
- 569
390 What is personalize
391 What is Help Center
392 What is System News
393 What is Central Search
TCRM20
- 570
394 What are the first and second navigation entries TCRM20
- 571
395 To which System Objects we assign the Roles
396 To Which System Element we assign a User
411
397 What are the different kinds of Links on the Screen 412
398 What is the Logical relation between the Navigation Bar and the BR
399 What determines what will on the NB
413
400 What is the use of the Work Center
401 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 572
402 What is the use of the Create TCRM20
- 573
403 Which functions are presented on the Homepage
404 To which System Object is it assigned
TCRM20
- 574
405 What is the use of the Work List TCRM20
- 575
406 What is the use of the Calendar
407 What are the configuration options
TCRM20
- 576
408 Which system could be synched with the Email application
409 What is the restriction of the connection between the systems regarding
the Emails
410 What is the purpose of the logical links on the Web Client UI Which
logical links are there (4)
414 TCRM20
- 578
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center
412 What determines the Work Center
413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the
different between them
414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports
TCRM20
- 579
415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20
- 580
416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20
- 581
417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20
- 586
418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20
- 587
419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)
420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the
assignment block (4)
TCRM20
- 588
421 What is the second view possibility on the UI
422 For what is it used
423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view
424 Who may use this view
TCRM20
- 589
425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20
- 590
426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)
427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display
428 Give examples for Hierarchies
TCRM20
- 591
429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415
430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417
431 What is the role configuration key
432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key
419
433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench
434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed
by the EEWB
435 What is the user application of the EEWB
436 What is the advantage of the EEWB
437 What is the influence on other systems
421
438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422
439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20
- 613
440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each
441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user
442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model
TCRM20
- 615
443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)
444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links
445 What are the customization options of the NB profile
TCRM20
- 617
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
14 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
411 What is the purpose of the applications on the work center
412 What determines the Work Center
413 What kinds of reports are available on the CRM System and what is the
different between them
414 Which system component is required and which role define the reports
TCRM20
- 579
415 What is the objective and use of the CRM Reports (5) TCRM20
- 580
416 What is the Objective and use of the Search Function TCRM20
- 581
417 What is the functionality of the advanced search TCRM20
- 586
418 What is the OVP What are its attributes TCRM20
- 587
419 What are the attributes of the assignment blocks (5)
420 What are the settings made in the UI configuration tools regarding the
assignment block (4)
TCRM20
- 588
421 What is the second view possibility on the UI
422 For what is it used
423 Which system customizing is responsible for the design of the view
424 Who may use this view
TCRM20
- 589
425 What is the editing possibility of the AB TCRM20
- 590
426 What is the objective of the Hierarchy display (2)
427 What is the editing possibility of the Hierarchy display
428 Give examples for Hierarchies
TCRM20
- 591
429 Which external applications can be added to the Web Client UI (3) 415
430 What is the use of the component Workbench What are its abilities (3) 417
431 What is the role configuration key
432 Which System Object is assigned to the Configuration Key
419
433 What is the objective of the Enhancement Workbench
434 Give examples for Business Object that may be changed and designed
by the EEWB
435 What is the user application of the EEWB
436 What is the advantage of the EEWB
437 What is the influence on other systems
421
438 What is the functionality of the Framework Enhancement Concept 422
439 What determines the list of activities on the work center links TCRM20
- 613
440 What are the characteristics of a Role (6) What is the meaning of each
441 What is the logical relation between the BR the Org Unit and the user
442 Which options there are to maintain the organizational model
TCRM20
- 615
443 What are the different types of links on the Web Client Screen (4)
444 What is the role of the Navigation Bar Profile regarding the links
445 What are the customization options of the NB profile
TCRM20
- 617
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
15 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
446 Where is the customization done
447 What is the logical relation between the work centers and other type of
links
448 What is the relation between the NB profile and the Work Centers
449 What is the recommended way for assigning a NB profile to a BR
TCRM20
- 619
450 On the IMG Application what does it mean In Menu TCRM20
- 620
451 What is under the control of the layout Profile (5)
452 Where is it customized
TCRM20
- 622
453 What are the three areas controlled by the Layout profile and where are
they customized Which links are contained in each area What is the
influence of the layout profile on these links
TCRM20
- 623
454 What is the role of the function profile Give examples
455 Which types of function profile are there (4)
456 What determines the type of the functional profile
457 For each Functional Profile where is it determined which kind of
functional profile is it
TCRM20
- 624
458 To which organizational object is it possible to assign a BR
459 What are the BR assignment restrictions and rules regarding the Org
unit position and user
TCRM20
- 626
460 Where do you define the BR to an organizational Object TCRM20
- 627
461 What is the portal integration
462 What are the possible options regarding the connection between the
CRM and the portal (4) What is the Business role option with the portal
TCRM20
- 629
463 Which are the generic functional Profiles in the CRM System TCRM20
- 636
464 What is the purpose of the authorization management on the system
465 Which authorization parameters are there
466 Where is the authorization profile defined
467 Which BTr manages the authorization profiles
468 What is the logic relation between the BR and the user regarding
authorization
`
469 What is the sequence of events when creating a new Authorization
profile
TCRM20
- 641
470 What determines the links a user has when he signs into a role
(SALES_PRO SERVICE_PRO and MARKETING_PRO)
TCRM20
- 648
471 What is the hierarchy between the NB profile and the various links
472 What is the logical relation between the NB profile and the various links
473 What are the link group types Where it is defined for a link
474 What does it mean in menu when defining on define Business Role
475 What does it mean visible when defining on define Business Role
476 What are the types of the WCLL
TCRM20
- 653
477 What are in definition the DLG TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
16 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
- 655
478 What is the Transaction Launcher (TL)
479 Which type of transaction can the TL operate What are they signs
480 Which Parameters are required to be defined on each and what is the
different between them
TCRM20
- 669 ndash
673
481 What is it required to define after creating a TL in order to be able to view
the BTr Where is it defined
TCRM20
- 674
482 What are the three CRM WC UI Layers Why are there three layers
What purpose does it serve
483 What is BSP What is its goal On which technology is it based
484 What is BOL
485 What is a Genil What is its role
TCRM20
- 689
486 What is UI Component TCRM20
- 692
487 What is the model of the BSP
488 What the view of the BSP
489 What is the Controller of the BSP
TCRM20
- 694
490 What is the MVC Concept How is the sequence of events by the
concept
TCRM20
- 695
491 How does the controller initiate a contact with the Context nodes
492 What is the relation between the Model and the BOL
TCRM20
- 696
493 What is the data binding Which path the linking is going TCRM20
- 697
494 What is the role of the Genil Why is the Genil needed
495 Which data handling does the Genil (5 - The actions are logical data
handling)
TCRM20
- 709
496 What is the role of the configuration key To which BSP landscape
object it refers
497 Why is it required to define different configuration keys to different users
TCRM20
- 732
498 What are the various options that are defined by the configuration key
role (5)
TCRM20
- 735
499 What are the layout Options on the screen TCRM20
- 737
500 What is the role of the design layer
501 What is the purpose of the design layer
502 Where the design layer is logical positioned
503 What is the design Object What is its purpose Which UI objects are
linked to it
TCRM20
- 757
504 What is the Fact Sheet What are the business uses of it
505 What is an Assignment
506 What are the two output options of the fact sheet
TCRM20
- 766
507 What is the purpose of the EEW (3) TCRM20
- 785
508 What is the use of the EEW TCRM20
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
17 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Question Page
on
CR100
Page on
TCRM
509 What is the other name of the EEW - 786
510 What is the logical structure of an EEW Object What characterize the
different elements
511 What are the processing restrictions
TCRM20
- 787
512 What is sequence of events when creating new fields on table via the
EEW What is the difference when creating a new table
TCRM20
- 788
513 What is the Application Enhancement Tool What is the different
between the EEW
514 What are the options that Application Enhancement Tool is offering (7)
TCRM20
- 812
515 How many accesses are there for the Application Enhancement Tool and
which
TCRM20
- 812
516 Which has more influence on SO The AET or the EEW
517 Does the AHE runs on the SAPGUI
518 What are the types of system object handled by the AET Which are
not
TCRM20
- 821
519 What is the different between the UI Configuration tool and the EEW
when initiating a change
TCRM20
- 829
520 What is a component
521 What is the component enhancement concept
522 How does it work
523 What are the process elements when creating a new component
TCRM20
- 830
524
Question Page on
TCR
1 What are the departments that have a contact with the customer according to
the SAP
2 What four other added values the system provides
TCRM10 -
26
3 What are the main functions of the Marketing Module (6)
4 What is the logic relation between them
5 What are the main characteristics of the Marketing (2)
TCRM10 -
27
6 What are the main functions of the Sales Module (6)
7 What is the logic relation between them
8 What are the main characteristics of the Sales (3)
TCRM10 -
28
9 What are the main functions of the Service Module (7)
10 What is the logic relation between them
TCRM10 -
29
11 What are the five Interaction channels TCRM10 -
30
12 What are the different SAP CRM Scenarios and what is the main task for each TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
18 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
(8) 37
13 What is the main Idea of the System Architecture
14 Which kind of relation has the CRM System (7)
TCRM10 -
44
15 What is the data exchange between the ECC and the CRM Which kind of
updates tare there
16 What is required to verify when sales are transferred to the ECC and which
component do it What is the purpose of the verification
TCRM10 -
46
17 Which CRM System Component controls the data exchange
18 What is the role of the adapters
19 What is the CRM Adapter
20 What are the three main CRM Server Areas
TCRM10 -
47
21 What characterizes the Internet application (2)
22 What are the different components on the Application (3)
23 What are the three layers of the IC architecture and what characterize each
TCRM10 -
52
24 What is the purpose of the IC
25 What are the different communication channels to the IC (4)
TCRM10 -
53
26 What are the data exchange restrictions between the CRM and the mobile
users (3)
TCRM10 -
54
27 What is the communication station TCRM10 -
55
28 What is the L Shape What is its purpose What characterizes it TCRM10 -
61
29 What is an Over view Page What characterizes it TCRM10 -
63
30 Which systems are integrated with the Marketing What is the purpose of the
integration
31 What is the way to manage budget on the CRM Marketing
TCRM10 -
80
32 What is the purpose of the Marketing plan
33 What is the market plan Elements What characterizes it (2)
34 What are the sub elements of a MP
35 What are the campaigns Give examples (4)
36 What are the campaign characters (4)
37 What are the sub elements of a campaign
TCRM10 -
81
38 What is the meaning of segmentation
39 What are the three different kinds of segmentation What are the data
resources for each
40 What is required in order to be able to segment the customers
41 What is the use of the attribute list
TCRM10 -
86
42 What is the graphical Modeler TCRM10 -
88
43 What is the purpose of the target group What is the hierarchy within the target TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
19 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
group method
44 What is the type of relation between them and who is assigned to whom
89
45 What is the activity TCRM10 -
95
46 What is the role of the target group in the campaign
47 What is the call list What is its relation to the TG To which SO is it assigned
TCRM10 -
96
48 What is the target of campaign automation (2)
49 How does is works (4)
50 What is the goal of the Trade Promotion Management
51 What are the business uses or target of the TPM
TCRM10 -
108
52 What is the Process of TPM
53 Which functions could be integrated with the TPM What is the meaning of
each
TCRM10 -
109
54 What are the different functions on the E Channels (4) TCRM10 -
118
55 What are the main goals of the web channel (4) TCRM10 -
119
56 What are the E channel processes that the CRM offers (5) TCRM10 -
120
57 What are the goals of the web Service (3)
58 What are the different kinds of processes that the CRM system offers regarding
E Service (7) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
133
59 What are the two E Service scenarios that the CRM System offers TCRM10 -
135
60 What are the Web Marketing functions (activities that the customer may
perform on the web channel - 5) Give examples for each
TCRM10 -
140
61 What is the Web Channel Manager What is its advantage TCRM10 -
141
62 What is the meaning of the Partner Channel Management (PCM)
63 What is PRM
64 Which business scenarios are integrated throughout the PCM in order to
achieve it efficient How
TCRM10 -
150
65 What is eh concept of the PCM
66 What are the functions of the PCM (3)
TCRM10 -
151
67 What is the SAP CRM Channel Management
68 Which functions are offered by the platform and what is the meaning of each
(6)
TCRM10 -
153
69 What is the Channel Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
157
70 What is the Partner Manager What are his responsibilities TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
20 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
71 Which other groups are integrated into the Partner Manager 158
72 What is the purpose and goals of the Channel E Commerce (4) TCRM10 -
170
73 What are the two business scenarios for the E commerce How does the
Business Partner integrate
TCRM10 -
171
74 What is the MDF TCRM10 -
178
75 What is the goal of the Marketing Channel Fund TCRM10 -
179
76 What is the closed loop Cycle What is its purpose
77 Which processes it follows
78 What are its attributes (3)
TCRM10 -
188
79 What are the main uses of the Key Account or contact Management (4) TCRM10 -
189
80 What is the purpose of the activity Management
81 What are the different kinds of Activities on the System
TCRM10 -
193
82 What are the processes that the activity management can offer a user (7) TCRM10 -
194
83 What is the process of communicating with other systems TCRM10 -
195
84 What is the purpose of the opportunity Management TCRM10 -
199
85 What are the options that the opportunity Management offers a sales man (6) TCRM10 -
200
86 What is the sales Methodology What are the key elements of the sales
Methodology (4)
TCRM10 -
201
87 What are the initials PPM
88 What is the purpose of the tool
89 Who uses it and how (2)
TCRM10 -
201
90 Which parameters are managing the Quotations (7) TCRM10 -
207
91 Which parameters are managing the Orders (4) TCRM10 -
208
92 What is the business purpose of the contract What is it good for a business to
maintain contracts
93 What are the business goals of a contract (4)
94 What is the relation between the contract and the order
TCRM10 -
218
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
21 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
95 What is the main difference between the contract and the order
96 What are the key elements of the contract (6 ndash not SOs) TCRM10 -
219
97 What are the relation between SAP ERP contracts and CRM contracts
regarding work processes and updates (4)
TCRM10 -
220
98 What is the ICM What is his use
99 What are its business goals (3)
100 What are the attributes (3) Process data and results
TCRM10 -
225
101 What are the main roles in an IC
102 What is the scratch pad
103 What is the Account info
104 What is the Alert
105 What is the Communication Information
106 For which application the tool bar is used Ready not ready Type of timers
107 Which system is required in order to integrate the telephony system
TCRM10 -
231
108 How does the IC support the different business scenarios of the CRM
109 Which communication channels can be processed through the IC (5)
TCRM10 -
232
110 What is the use of a survey a scripts and call lists in the IC How can they be
integrated
TCRM10 -
233
111 How are the processes listed on question 59 are integrated into the IC TCRM10 -
234
112 What is the purpose of knowledge search How goes the process of the
knowledge search What are the results
TCRM10 -
235
113 What is the role of the IC Manager (4)
114 What is an Interactive scripting
115 What is ERMS
116 What is the IDI
TCRM10 -
247
117 With which transactions can the interactive scripting be integrated and how
(3)
118 What are the possible outputs of the Interactive scripting (2)
TCRM10 -
248
119 What is the purpose of the IDI With which system elements is the IDI
planned
120 What is the relation between the IDI and the Interactive scripting
121 What other IDI tools are there
TCRM10 -
249
122 What is the call list To Which SO is it assigned What is the process of
creating a call list
TCRM10 -
250
123 What is the purpose of the dashboard (3)
124 Which parameters can be shown on the dashboard (4)
TCRM10 -
251
125 What is the suggested service process of the CRM TCRM10 -
257
126 What is the installation Management TCRM10 -
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
22 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
127 What are the options for modeling a product by the customer (2)
128 What are the installed base purposes (4)
129 Are the installed Base is called on the ERP system
130 Why is the downloading between the two system is important
258
131 What are the attributes of an installed Base (4) TCRM10 -
258
132 What is a service contract
133 What are the characters of the service contract
134 What is required to be on the service confirmation
135 What is the relation between the service contract and the service
agreement Where is it defined
136 What is the service Management cycle (8) What is the meaning of each
phase
137 What kind of service Management are there (3)
138 What are the service contracts attributes (8 ndash not SO) TCRM10 -
263
139 What determines the profile of a service contract
140 What is determined under parts (3)
141 Which is the preceding document of a service contract
TCRM10 -
264
142 What is the service planner
143 Which three parameters its processes What triggers each (3)
144 What are the uses of the planner (2)
TCRM10 -
265
145 What is the purpose of the resource Planner Application
146 What service elements does it process (4)
TCRM10 -
271
147 With which external system application can the service integrate (4) TCRM10 -
274
148 What are the goals of the returns and complaints (3)
149 What is the process of the returns and complaints
150 Which system Object is to be attached to a complaint or return
151 What is automatically generated when a returns and complaints are created
TCRM10 -
285
152 Which documents can be assigned to returns and complaints What kinds
153 What is the warranty check
154 What is the RMA In which cases is it used In which cases is it used
TCRM10 -
286
155 What is the lifecycle of an InsB (which BTr and processes are related -7)
156 In term of system objects what is the InsB
157 What is the hierarchy of the InsB What is the meaning of each
158 Which main system functions are using the InsB
159 What are the attributes of an InsB
160 What is the purpose of the in house repair
161 What is the suggested process of in house repair
162 Which other modules are connected to this process
163 Which system objects are related to the in house repair
164 What is the preceding document policy of the in house repair
165 What is the document logic of an in house repair
TCRM10 -
290
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
23 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
166 What is possible to determine for each item on an in house repair
167 What are the main functions of the in house repair
168 What is the business purpose of the Mobile Field Application
169 Which business scenarios are integrated into the MFA
170 What are the user attributes of the SAP MFA (4)
171 Which kind of applications management does it provide (6)
TCRM10 -
295
172 Which system component controls the MFA What are its uses (2)
173 What is a site What are its parameters (2)
174 What is a subscription
TCRM10 -
303
175 What is the MAS
176 What is the MAR
TCRM10 -
304
177 What is the hierarchy of definition TCRM10 -
305
178 On which environment is the mobile client active
179 Which system component is responsible for the translation between the
CRM server and the mobile client
180 From a technical point of view where is it controlled which clients are used in
the field and based on which criteria the replication logic should take place
TCRM10 -
307
181 What is the SAP Mobile Engine Where is it installed What is its main role
What does it enables
182 What does it include (3)
183 Which technologies run it
TCRM10 -
315
184 What is the business purpose of the CRM Analytics
185 What are its goals (5)
186 What are the business uses (4)
TCRM10 -
324
187 What are the business actions in the customer Analytics (3)
188 What are business purposes of the forecasting (2)
189 Which kinds of strategic planning the system offers (4)
190 What are business purposes of the decision supporting (2)
TCRM10 -
328
191 What are the different analyses that the CRM Analytics offers TCRM10 -
335
192 What is the business purpose of the interactive reports What is analyzed
193 What is the process of defining a report (6)
TCRM10 -
342
194 What is the purpose of the SAP Solution Manger
195 What are its goals What is the result
196 What is the scope of the SM
TCRM10 -
353
197 What is a project preparation
198 What is Business Blue Prints
199 Realization
200 Final Preparation
201 What are Road Maps What are its two elements (action and result)
202 SAP Content support Implementation What us its use
203 Service Level reporting
TCRM10 -
354
204 Early Warning Alert ndash system monitoring Who uses it
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
24 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
205 Support Desk
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
25 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
SAP CR 100
Page Theme
21 Exercises for Personalization of the Web Client UI
33 Creating Number Groupings and ranges for BP
42 Customizing Account classification
44 Customizing Account life cycle
45 Determination of the life cycle flow
Definition of exclusion Groups
47 Customizing mini Templates
52 Migrating accounts from R3 to the CRM
53 BP customization
57 Exercises for account management and account maintenance
61 Exercises for account management and customizing types of address
63 Exercises for account management and templates for sale area
69 Adding and Customizing Address Type
71 Creation of Mini Templates
90 The work Flow for determining an organizational Management
92 Customizing Organizational Data Determination
96 Copying Organizational Model from the ERP to the CRM
99 Exercises for creating Organizational Model
103 Creating an Organizational Model and setting Organizational Data
determinaton
113 Customizing unchangeable Product Master Data from the ERP on the CRM
117 Preparatory steps before setting the Product Master Data
118 Define Service and Warranty Products
121 Displaying new Set types on the Webclient
122 To upload data from the ERP system to the CRM System
125 Exercises for Product Maintenance and Enhancement
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
26 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
139 Adding Attributes to a Product Master
141 Setting Price for a product on the Web Client
143 Defining a Product Hierarchy and a Product Category and assigning to a
Product + adding field to the product Master data
159 Copt Control Customizing
160 Creating an Object Relationship Profile
163 Customizing Text Object and Text Types
Customizing Text Determination Procedure and Access Sequence
165 Customizing Date Profile
Customizing Date Types
166 Customizing Status Profile for Users
168 Customizing Incompleteness Check
169 Process of defining the Incompleteness Check
170 Activating Change History
173 Exercises for Transaction processing
177 Exercises for Copying Control
179 Exercises for Text Determination
181 Exercises for Incompleteness Check
183 Exercises for Alternative service Scenarios
219 Customizing specific Settings to Transaction types
221 Customizing Questionnaires for Transactions
224 Customizing Activity Analysis
227 Exercises for customizing management Activity
247 Customizing Partner Function
248 Customizing Partner Determination Procedure
249 Customizing Access Sequence
251 Exercises for Partner Processing
278 Customizing Actions
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
27 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
Definition of Conditions
285 Exercises for Action definitions and Customizing
307 Customizing Pricing Procedure
308 Assignment of Pricing Procedure
309 Customizing and defining Condition Types
310 Customizing and defining Sequence Access
311 Customizing and defining Condition Tables
List of Condition Tables on the System
314 General Conditions Maintenance
315 Customizing GCM (general Condition Maintenance)
321 Exercises for Condition Maintenance and Pricing
326 Setting a Discount for customer on a pricing procedure
346 Customizing Split Criteria for a Billing Document
350 Customizing Billing Plans
351 Customizing Billing activities
357 Billing configuration
359 Exercises for creating a Billing Documents
365 Creating a billing Document
380 Starting initial Load
Access to the Administration Console
384 Starting and monitoring the initial Load
386 Access to Bdoc Modeler
391 Debugging error when transferring information between servers
393 Exercises in Middle Ware
410 Customizing user rules on the Web client UI
413 Customizing of navigation and business roles
416 Personalize setting the Web client UI
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
28 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
417 Configuring UI components
419 Role Configuration
420 Creating Customer Specific Configurations
TCR_10
Page Theme
68 Creation of BSP Favorite on the SAP GUI
82 Creation of Marketing Plan
98 Creating Campaign with Mail Form
486 Allowing or disallowing uploads of each product in Customizing
490 Maintain set types and attributes
491 Creating base hierarchies and set type for CRM stand alone
Generation of base Hierarchies by customizing download from ERP
TCR_20
Page Theme
224 Creation Of new Action Profile and Assignment to the TrTy
352 Creation of a new site on the Administration Console
583 Customizing the usage of charts on the UI
642 Creating PFCG and assigning BR and User
654 Assigning a new Work Center to a Navigation Bar Profile
662 Assigning a new Direct Group Link to a Navigation Bar Profile
680 Definition of Transaction Launcher
739 UI Frame Work Design Create Page layout (tiles or assignment blocks)
754 UI Frame Work Design Change the assignment blocks
768 Configuration of the fact sheet
793 Adding new Objects (tables or fields) ndash the Easy Enhancement Workbench
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing
SAP CRM CR100 TCRM10 TCRM20 - Questions for the certification preparation
29 copy 2010 by Itay Abuhav ndash itay705gmailcom All Rights Reserved
842 Component Enhancement Customizing